JP5576531B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention provides a winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a profit to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a profit to the player based on a winning determination made by the corresponding determination means. The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a profit grant state control means for controlling to a profit grant state.

Conventionally, in general, a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine performs a win determination based on a winning of a game ball at a start winning opening, and when the determination result is a big hit, a big hit gaming state (profit granting state) It was supposed to occur. In such a pachinko machine, an effect is provided in the gaming area by performing an effect in accordance with the winning determination and deriving an effect result corresponding to the determination result.
The thing which suppresses the reduction of the interest in the winning judgment was proposed. Moreover, as such a pachinko machine, as disclosed in Patent Document 1, a movable accessory that operates based on driving of a motor (electrical drive source) in a game area defined on a game board surface ( Movable body),
Alternatively, as disclosed in Patent Document 2, by providing a movable accessory (movable body) that operates based on driving of a solenoid (electric drive source) in the game area, a visual interest for the player is provided. Some have been proposed that suppress this reduction.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2008-295627 (FIG. 6) Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-323939 (FIG. 3)

By the way, in the structure which provided the movable body which operate | moves based on the drive of an electric drive source like the above-mentioned patent document 1 or patent document 2 in the part facing a player, such a movable body is provided from a player. It was placed in isolation. That is, the movable body is disposed on the back side of the transparent plate that covers the front surface of the game board. For this reason, the player only sees the movement of the movable body based on the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, cannot experience the movement, and the interest in the movement of the movable body is reduced. It was.
The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to suppress a decrease in interest with respect to the movement of the movable body in the configuration including the movable body that operates based on the drive of the electric drive source. It is another object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be used and that can produce a novel gaming property.

(Solution 1)
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention makes a winning determination by a winning determination means for determining whether or not to give a player a profit based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a corresponding winning determination means. A profit granting state control means for controlling to a profit granting state for giving a profit to the player based on the fact, an effecting means for giving an effect accompanying the game, and an effect by the effecting means based on the determination result of the winning determination means And a movable body that operates in a manner that is visible to the player based on driving of an electrical drive source in accordance with a predetermined rendering mode by the rendering unit, the gaming machine comprising: The movable body is configured to be touchable by the player, and can be stopped / reversed by the player's finger touch even in the driving state of the electric drive source, and an operation for detecting the motion of the movable body Detection means The production control means includes operation detection production control means for performing control that affects the production content of the production means according to the motion detection of the movable body by the operation detection means, and the gaming machine includes: When the predetermined effect mode is executed by the effect means, the player is notified that the predetermined effect mode is executed by driving the electric drive source and operating the movable body. The notice action control means includes a notice action control means, and when the predetermined effect mode by the effect means is the first effect mode, the player forcibly moves the movable object by touching the movable object. In response to this, when the first aspect operation control means for stopping the driving of the electric drive source and the predetermined effect aspect by the effect means become the second effect aspect, Touch the movable body Be forcibly stop the operation of the movable body, characterized in that it comprises a and a second mode operation control means for providing a continuous tactile the player without stopping the driving of the electric driving source.
In this case, when a winning determination is made in the winning determination of the winning determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the content of the game can be made such that the profit granting state control means controls the profit granting state to give the player a profit. Further, in the gaming machine having such game contents, the player is informed that a predetermined production mode is executed by the production means by the operation of the movable body. And as a notice operation by such a movable body, when a predetermined production mode becomes the first production mode,
When the player touches the movable body to forcibly stop the operation of the movable body, the driving of the electric drive source is stopped accordingly, while the predetermined production mode becomes the second production mode. In some cases, even if the player touches the movable body to forcibly stop the operation of the movable body, the operation continues without stopping the driving of the electric drive source and gives the player a tactile sensation. For this reason, when the player touches the movable body, it can be known whether the predetermined production mode is the first production mode or the second production mode, but this fact is the player who touched the fact. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in touching the movable body and to suppress a decrease in interest in the notice operation of the movable body.
Further, according to this configuration, since the movable body that can be visually recognized according to the predetermined rendering mode by the rendering means is provided so as to be touchable by the player, the movement of the movable body based on the drive of the electrical drive source Can be directly experienced by the player, and as a result, a decrease in interest with respect to the movement of the movable body can be suppressed. In addition, the motion detection unit can detect the movement of the movable body that can be touched, and the motion detection by the motion detection unit, in other words, according to the finger touch operation of the movable body based on the player's intention, Since the control that affects the performance contents of the performance means is performed, it is possible to generate a novel game characteristic in which the player's intention intervenes in the operation of the gaming machine.

(Solution 2)
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine of the present invention includes a gaming board in which a gaming area is partitioned,
A ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area in response to an operation of an operation handle, a winning opening arranged in the gaming area where a game ball can be won, and a game ball won in the winning opening A winning detection means for detecting, a ball payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls in response to the detection of the game balls by the winning detection means, and whether or not a profit should be given to the player based on establishment of a predetermined condition A winning determination means for making a determination, a profit granting state control means for controlling to a profit granting state for giving a profit to the player based on the winning determination made by the corresponding winning determination means, and an effecting means for performing an effect accompanying the game And an effect control means for controlling the effect by the effect means based on the determination result of the winning determination means, and a player can visually recognize the drive based on the drive of the electric drive source according to a predetermined effect mode by the effect means. To work The movable body is configured to be touchable by a player and can be stopped / reversed by touching the player even when the electric drive source is in a driving state. In addition, motion detection means for detecting the motion of the movable body is provided, and the effect control means is configured to detect the motion of the movable body by the motion detection means,
Including an action detection effect control means for performing control that affects the effect contents of the effect means, and the gaming machine controls the electric drive source when a predetermined effect mode is executed by the effect means. And moving the movable body to provide a notice operation control means for notifying the player that the predetermined effect form is to be executed, and the notice action control means has a predetermined effect form by the effect means. In the case of one production mode, when the player touches the movable body to forcibly stop the operation of the movable body, the first mode operation stops the driving of the electric drive source accordingly. In a case where the predetermined rendering mode by the control unit and the rendering unit is the second rendering mode, even if the player forcibly stops the operation of the movable body by touching the movable body, the electrical Continue driving without stopping the drive source Characterized in that it comprises a second aspect the operation control means for providing a tactile sensation to the player, the.
In this case, when a winning determination is made in the winning determination of the winning determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the content of the game can be made such that the profit granting state control means controls the profit granting state to give the player a profit. Further, in the gaming machine having such game contents, the player is informed that a predetermined production mode is executed by the production means by the operation of the movable body. And as a notice operation by such a movable body, when a predetermined production mode becomes the first production mode,
When the player touches the movable body to forcibly stop the operation of the movable body, the driving of the electric drive source is stopped accordingly, while the predetermined production mode becomes the second production mode. In some cases, even if the player touches the movable body to forcibly stop the operation of the movable body, the operation continues without stopping the driving of the electric drive source and gives the player a tactile sensation. For this reason, when the player touches the movable body, it can be known whether the predetermined production mode is the first production mode or the second production mode, but this fact is the player who touched the fact. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in touching the movable body and to suppress a decrease in interest in the notice operation of the movable body.
Further, according to this configuration, since the movable body that can be visually recognized according to the predetermined rendering mode by the rendering means is provided so as to be touchable by the player, the movement of the movable body based on the drive of the electrical drive source Can be directly experienced by the player, and as a result, a decrease in interest with respect to the movement of the movable body can be suppressed. In addition, the motion detection unit can detect the movement of the movable body that can be touched, and the motion detection by the motion detection unit, in other words, according to the finger touch operation of the movable body based on the player's intention, Since the control that affects the performance contents of the performance means is performed, it is possible to generate a novel game characteristic in which the player's intention intervenes in the operation of the gaming machine.

(Solution 3)
In the solving means 1 or 2, the effect means is constituted by a symbol display means for displaying the symbols in a variable manner and stopping the display result, and the effect control means is based on the determination result of the winning determination means. The symbol display result according to the determination result is stopped after a predetermined period of time is displayed, and the symbol is displayed when the winning determination means determines that a profit should be given to the player. It is comprised from the symbol display control means which performs a reach effect after displaying in a reach mode, and stops and displays a specific display result as a display result.
In this case, the winning determination by the winning determination means can be enhanced by the symbol display by the symbol display means, and the determination result can be recognized by the player based on the display result of the symbols. Can prevent a decrease in interest.

(Solution 4)
In the solving means 3, the notice operation control means is configured to display a display result other than the specific display result once after the reach effect is executed, and then the mode in which the reach effect is developed is executed. As a production mode, the movable body is operated.
In this case, after the reach effect is executed, display results other than the specific display result are displayed once.
After that, the movable body operates as a trigger for the effect that the reach effect is developed. For this reason, the development of reach production can be boosted by the operation of the movable body, and as a result, a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 5)
In the solving means 4, the first mode operation control unit drives the electric drive source with the mode developed into a reach production with a low ratio in which the determination result of the winning judgment unit is a win judgment as the first production mode. On the other hand, the second mode operation control means controls the drive of the electrical drive source with the second development mode as a mode that develops a reach production with a high ratio that the determination result of the winning determination unit is a winning determination. To do.
In this case, in the case where the determination result of the winning determination means is a mode that develops to a reach production with a low rate of winning determination, if the player touches the movable body and forcibly stops the operation of the movable body Accordingly, in the case where the driving of the electric drive source is stopped while the determination result of the winning determination means develops to a reach production with a high ratio of winning determination, the player touches the movable body. Thus, even if the operation of the movable body is forcibly stopped, the drive of the electric drive source is continued without stopping. Therefore, when the player touches the movable body, it can be seen whether it develops to a reach production with a low percentage of winning judgment or a reach production with a high percentage of winning judgment. It is possible to increase interest in touching and to suppress a decrease in interest in the notice operation of the movable body.

(Solution 6)
In the solution means 3, the notice operation control means displays the specific display result or the display result other than the specific display result as the final display result after the display result other than the specific display result is once displayed. The movable body is operated with the mode as the predetermined production mode.
In this case, after the display result other than the specific display result is once displayed, the specific display result is displayed as the final display result (including the case where the final display result is a display result other than the specific display result). The movable body operates as an opportunity. For this reason, it is possible to excite the effect of switching from the loss display result to the jackpot display result by the operation of the movable body, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Solution 7)
In the solving means 6, the first mode operation control means controls the driving of the electric drive source with the display result other than the specific display result as the final display result as the first effect mode. On the other hand, the second mode operation control means drives and controls the electric drive source with the mode in which the specific display result is displayed as the final display result as the second rendering mode.
In this case, when the display result other than the specific display result is displayed as the final display result, if the player forcibly stops the operation of the movable body by touching the movable body, In the case where the drive of the electric drive source is stopped along with the specific display result as the final display result, the player touches the movable body to force the movement of the movable body. Even if the operation is stopped, the drive of the electric drive source is continued without stopping. Therefore, when the player touches the movable body, it can be determined whether a display result other than the specific display result is displayed as the final display result or the specific display result is displayed. It is possible to increase interest in touching and to suppress a decrease in interest in the notice operation of the movable body.

(Solution 8)
In the solving means 3, when the winning judgment is made in the winning judgment means and the specific condition is established, the next profit granting state is generated in the normal gaming state after the profit granting state is ended by the profit granting state control means. Special game state control means for controlling to a special game state, which is easier than the above, and effect operation control means for controlling the operation of the movable body based on the drive control of the electric drive source, the symbol display The control means stops and displays a special display result predetermined as the specific display result when the winning determination is made in the winning determination means and the specific condition is satisfied, and the advance action control means displays the special display result. After the specific display result other than is displayed once, the special display result other than the special display result or the special display result as the final display result As the predetermined representation embodiment the aspects to be displayed, to operate the movable member.
In this case, after the specific display result other than the special display result is once displayed, the special display result is displayed as the final display result (the final display result may be a specific display result other than the special display result. The movable body operates as an opportunity. For this reason, the effect which switches from the display result which is not controlled to a special game state by the operation | movement of a movable body to the display result which is controlled to a special game state can be excited, and, thereby, the interest reduction of a game can be suppressed.

(Solution 9)
In the solving means 8, the first mode operation control means drives the electric drive source with the first display mode as a mode in which a specific display result other than the special display result is displayed as the final display result. On the other hand, the second mode operation control means drives and controls the electrical drive source with the mode in which the special display result is displayed as the final display result as the second effect mode.
In this case, in the case where a specific display result other than the special display result is displayed as the final display result, when the player forcibly stops the operation of the movable body by touching the movable body,
Along with this, while the drive of the electric drive source is stopped, the special display result is displayed as the final display result, and the player touches the movable body to operate the movable body. Even if it is forcibly stopped, the drive of the electric drive source is continued without stopping. For this reason, when the player touches the movable body, it is possible to know whether a specific display result other than the special display result or a special display result is displayed as the final display result. It is possible to increase interest in touching the finger and to suppress a decrease in interest in the notice operation of the movable body.

(Solution 10)
In Solution 1 to Solution 9, the movable body is constituted by a ring member that performs a rotation operation based on driving of a motor as the electrical drive source.
In this case, the effect of the effect means can be more exciting by rotating the ring member according to a predetermined effect mode by the effect means.

(Solution 11)
In the solving means 10, the ring member is formed of a light-transmitting material, and light emitting means for optically decorating the ring member is provided therein.
In this case, the interior of the rotating ring member can be light decorated with the light emitting means,
The fall of the visual interest with respect to a ring member can be suppressed further.

According to the configuration of the present invention, in the configuration including the movable body that operates based on the drive of the electrical drive source, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest with respect to the movement of the movable body, and to achieve novel gameplay. Can be generated.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of a pachinko machine, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front upper right. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine from back upper left. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine from the front upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front upper left. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front upper right. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. 11A is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 11, FIG. 11B is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 13A, FIG. 11C is a sectional view taken along line DD, and FIG. . It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is AA sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is BB sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front left upper part of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back upper left of the door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame main body before attaching components from back upper left. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame which attached components from the front upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivoted the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front upper right. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame which attached components from back upper left. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine cut by a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front upper right. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure by the side of the main body frame with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. (A) is a perspective view of the entire ball striking device, and (B) is a perspective view with a firing motor portion removed. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. (A) is a front view which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, (B) is a perspective view of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is not operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. (A) is a plan view of a slide member provided in the ball striking device, (B) is a front view, (C) is a perspective view seen from the front upper right, and (D) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in the front view (B). It is. (A) is a perspective view of a prize ball tank, (B) is a plan view, and (C) is a side view. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit from back upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit from the upper left front. (A) is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball path unit, (B) is the top view. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the prize ball unit from back upper right. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the full tank unit from the front upper right. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the full tank unit from back upper right. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the center of the vertical direction of a pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. (A) is a side view of a locking device, (B) is the perspective view seen from the front side. (A) is a perspective view of the locking device as viewed from the upper right rear side, and (B) and (C) are sliding frames for a door frame and a sliding frame for a body frame that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a perspective view of palpitation. It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding frame for door frames, and the sliding frame for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back upper left. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front upper right. It is a front view of the game board which has a game area. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board which has a game field from the front upper right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board which has a game field from the upper left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board which has a game area | region, and was seen from diagonally forward. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center role from the front upper right, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the center role from the front upper left. It is the perspective view which looked at the entrance unit from the front upper right. It is a front view of a prize space formation cover body which has a frame-shaped decoration unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the prize space formation cover body which has a frame-shaped decoration unit from the front upper right. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a stage and a distribution effect apparatus. It is the perspective view which looked at the stage from the front upper right. It is a top view of a stage. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is DD sectional drawing of FIG. It is EE sectional drawing of FIG. It is a top view which shows the relationship between a distribution effect apparatus and a guide passage member. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the distribution effect apparatus and was seen from diagonally upper right. It is a part of block diagram which shows a control structure roughly. It is another part of the block diagram which shows a control structure schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate, and the process at the time of a power-off occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol and special electric accessory control process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening prize process in a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process in a special symbol and a special electrically-powered object control process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern setting process in a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the fluctuation | variation in a special symbol and special electric-power-object control process. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game start process in a special symbol and a special electrically-powered object control process. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit game start process in a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric utility jackpot control process in a special symbol and special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory small hit control process in a special symbol and special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the integrated CPU mounted in a periphery control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 16ms steady process performed by the integrated CPU mounted in a periphery control board. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process in a 16ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process in a 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design change start process in an effect control process. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the 1st lottery in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the 2nd lottery in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding an advantageous game state. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the normal lottery in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the production | presentation display control and decoration design variation control in an electrical decoration control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number memory means for special symbols. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure in a distribution effect apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure at the time of using a table in control in a distribution effect apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows an operation ring unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows an operation ring unit. FIG. 3A is a top view showing the operation ring unit, and FIG. 2B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in FIG. FIG. 4A is a top view showing the operation ring unit, and FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. It is a rear perspective view showing a ring cap and a ring gear. FIG. 2A is a perspective view from the left side showing the ring gear and the LED / switch board, and FIG. 2B is a perspective view from the right side showing the ring gear and the LED / switch board. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which LED and the switch board | substrate were attached to the unit base | substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the shielding board of a ring gear with a clockwise rotation of a ring cap, and a photo switch. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the shielding plate of a ring gear and photoswitch accompanying rotation of a ring cap counterclockwise. FIG. 6A is a table showing ON / OFF of the photoswitch accompanying the clockwise rotation of the ring cap, and FIG. 9B shows the ON / OFF of the photoswitch accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the ring cap. It is a list figure which shows OFF. FIGS. 4A to 4F are explanatory views showing an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device when the button mechanism and the ring mechanism of the operation ring unit function as operation means. FIGS. 9A to 9E are explanatory views showing examples of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device when the button mechanism and the ring mechanism of the operation ring unit function as operation means. FIGS. 9A to 9F are explanatory views showing display screens of the liquid crystal display device when determining whether or not to perform the selection operation by the ring mechanism. It is a flowchart which shows the selection operation detection process in an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification 1 of the selection operation detection process in an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the modification 2 of the selection operation detection process in an effect control process. FIGS. 4A to 4D are explanatory views showing an example of a button mechanism and a ring mechanism that function as movable effecting means, and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding thereto. FIGS. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a button mechanism and a ring mechanism that function as movable effect means, and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the button mechanism and the ring mechanism. FIGS. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a button mechanism and a ring mechanism that function as movable effect means, and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the button mechanism and the ring mechanism. FIGS. 9A to 9D are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a ring mechanism that functions as a movable effect means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the ring mechanism. It is a flowchart showing a rotation notice control process in the effect control process. FIGS. 9A to 9D are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a ring mechanism that functions as a movable effect means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the ring mechanism. FIGS. 9A to 9D are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a ring mechanism that functions as a movable effect means and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the ring mechanism. FIGS. 3A to 3C are explanatory views showing an example of a ring mechanism that functions as an operation explanation unit and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the ring mechanism. FIGS. 3A to 3C are explanatory views showing an example of a ring mechanism that functions as an operation explanation unit and a display screen of a liquid crystal display device corresponding to the ring mechanism.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1, FIG. 4 is a side view of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG.
Fig. 6 is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1, Fig. 6 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1, and Fig. 7 is a view of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear, and FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1.

1 to 8, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be mounted with an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A main body frame 3, a game window 101 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 and is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is driven, and a game window 101 that allows a player to visually recognize the game area 101 and a lower part of the game window 101. Door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing a ball that is arranged and paid out according to a game result
And is configured.

A lower front plate 14 whose surface is covered with a decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. Further, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3 as described above, and the ball hitting device 650 and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 excluding the game board 4 are provided at the bottom of the back surface thereof.
A board unit 1100 on which various control boards, power boards, etc. for controlling electrical components provided on the board are collectively provided is attached, and a rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 7).
A cover body 1250 is provided so as to be detachable. Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 250 and a handle device 460 so as to close the gaming window 101. The feature of the present embodiment is that there is one dish unit 300 provided in the door frame 5, and the handle device 46 provided in the main body frame 3 conventionally.
Since 0 is provided on the door frame 5 and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is not visible from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 9 to 13. 9 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 13 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 11A, a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 13A, and a sectional view taken along line DD. , EE sectional view (D
).

9 and 10, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment includes an upper and lower upper frame plate 10 and a lower frame plate 1.
1 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 are assembled in a rectangular shape by connecting them with connecting members 19 for connecting the respective end portions. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The side frame plates 12, 13 are fitted to the side surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact.

In that state, the insertion hole 21 and the left and right sides of the connecting member 19 are lowered by one step on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 (shown on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. Are also fixed by a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting screws 23 from above or below, and further, a plurality ( A plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 that are lowered by one step.
And the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 are secured by a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting screws 26 and 27 from the lateral outer side. Are firmly connected and fixed. However, one of the three connecting screws 26 and 27 is connected to the side frame plate 1.
The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the connecting member 19 are directly connected from the side, not connecting the connecting members 2 and 13 and the connecting member 19.

Of the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10
The lower frame plate 11 is made of the same wood as the conventional one, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light metal, for example, an extruded plate of an aluminum alloy. The reason that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall,
It is necessary to perform an operation of fixing the vertical angle of the island at a predetermined angle. Since such an operation is performed by driving nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, This is to make it easier to hit. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 23) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main body frame 3 can be widened. For this reason, the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension
This is because the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed large. However, if the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be secured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13C, the side frame plate 12 (the side frame plate 13 has the same structure). .)) Is formed on the inner side of the rear portion of the rear portion by a rib (the space portion 28 of the side frame 13 is shown in FIG. 12), and the thickness h of the rear portion is formed.
It is drawn and molded so that 1 becomes thick. Of course, the wall thickness h1 is the same as or slightly smaller than the wall thickness of the conventional wood.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13B and 13D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (on the side where one portion of the left and right portions lowered by one step of the connecting member 19 is fitted. 9 is formed in the groove 29 of the frame plate 13. From the groove 29 to the front end of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 13B to 13D, a flat plate shape with which the other side of the left and right portions whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step is brought into contact. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 29 is formed, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 13B, the recess 30 into which the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is inserted.
(The concave portion 30 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 10).

In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above has a hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 on the outer side of the side frame plate 12. A mounting hole 31 for fixing with a fixing screw 32 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 31, and a fixing screw 34 is formed at the lower portion thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support fitting 66. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is formed. Also, a mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the lower front plate 14 with a fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

On the other hand, in addition to the configuration for attaching the connecting member 19, the open side frame portion 13 is provided with an attachment hole 37 for attaching a closing projection 38 with an attachment screw 39 in the upper portion thereof, and closing the lower portion thereof. A mounting hole 40 for mounting the projection 41 with the mounting screw 42 is formed, and a mounting hole 43 for fixing the side frame plate 13 and the lower front plate 14 to the lowermost position with a fixing screw 44.
Is formed.

The closing projections 38 and 41 are provided when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2.
The hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 6) of the locking device 1000 attached along the open side.
7), and the cylinder lock 10 of the lock device 1000 as described in detail later.
By inserting a key into 10 and turning it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing projections 38 and 41, and the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2. is there.

The lower front plate 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface thereof when closed. The front and side surfaces of the decorative cover plate 15 are covered with a decorative cover plate 15, and a fixing protrusion 16 (see FIG. 12) is formed on the rear surface of the decorative cover plate 15. Landing protrusion 16
Is attached to the lower front plate 14 by being passed through a fastening hole 17 that passes through the lower front plate 14. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer cover 2 on the decorative cover plate 15.

By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the main frame 3 is attached along one upper surface of the upper support plate 45 and the lower front plate 14 that also serve to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support hole 47 formed by bending the support protrusion piece 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 46 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 25) of an upper shaft support fitting 503 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the flange 47.

Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed in a shape protruding forward, and a support protrusion 68 protrudes upward from the protruded portion, and a frame support plate 50 (to be described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 68.
6 (see FIG. 26) is inserted into the support hole. Accordingly, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, The shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support bracket 503 is supported by the supporting hole 47
It can be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed easily.

The upper support bracket 45 is attached to a mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 48 and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned so that the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above, and the upper frame The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fastened to the clamping plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

Further, there is a hanging piece 53 that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12 on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece 53, and this mounting hole and the mounting hole are provided. 31 is fixed with a fixing screw 32 to fix the upper support bracket 45 and the side frame plate 12 and the upper frame plate 1.
0 and the side frame plate 12 are connected via an upper support fitting 45.

On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 drilled in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, it is fixed to the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 which are constituent members thereof.
And the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by a connecting member 19 so that the connecting member 19 is connected to the side frame plate 12.
, 13 and is fixed in close contact with the inner surface of the connecting member 19, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other. can do. In addition to the engagement state of the connecting member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, when the connecting member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13, Since one part of the part is fitted, the side frame plate 12 of the connecting member 19,
As a result, the strength of the rectangular frame can be improved and the positioning can be performed accurately.

Further, when the upper support plate 45 is attached at a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island base (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Even when the lower support fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

(Door frame)
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. 14 is a front view of the door frame 5, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the door frame 5, FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 14, and FIG. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame 5 as viewed from the front.
These are the exploded perspective views seen from the back of door frame 5. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 14, 15, 18, and 19, the door frame 5 has a vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 formed on the upper part of a door frame main body 100 that is formed in a square shape. A door lens unit 120 is attached around the front surface, and a plate unit 300 is provided on the door frame main body 100 on the front surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101. One side (open side) of the plate unit 300
Further, an operation handle portion 461 (operation handle) of the handle device 460 is protruded and fixed.
Further, a reinforcing sheet metal 210 is fixed around the gaming window 101 on the back surface of the door frame main body 100, and a glass unit 250 is attached so as to close the gaming window 101, and a plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. A joint unit 480, a mounting base 280, and a frame decoration relay board 290 corresponding to the operation handle portion 461 are attached to the back surface of the frame. A security cover 270 having a security function is also attached to the bottom of the back surface of the glass unit 250. Hereinafter, a more detailed structure of each of the above constituent members constituting the door plate 5 will be described.

<Door frame body>
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the door frame main body 100 is formed in a frame shape with a synthetic resin, and as described above, the vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 is formed on the upper portion, and the gaming window 101 is formed.
The lower part is a plate-like part. A circular speaker opening 102 that penetrates a speaker 163, which will be described later, is formed on the upper left and right of the gaming window 101, and a stopper 254 of a glass unit 250, which will be described later, is locked below the speaker opening 102. A stop lever 108 (see FIG. 15) is rotatably provided. Note that the gaming window 101 according to the present embodiment is attached with the gaming board 4 having larger vertical and horizontal dimensions than conventional gaming windows 101, so the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the gaming window 101 are also increased. Yes. For this reason, the shape of the door frame lens unit 120, which will be described later, is greatly different from that generally known in the art.

On the other hand, in the plate-like portion below the game window 101, a prize ball passage port 103 through which the prize ball communication rod 451 of the dish unit 300 passes is opened at the upper part on the pivot support side. A lid opening 105 for detaching 406 is opened, and a ball feeding opening 104 for mounting the ball feeding unit 287 is opened at a position adjacent to the opening side of the lid opening 105. Further, a lock hole 10 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates closer to the open side.
6 has been established.

Also, a joint unit mounting recess 107 for attaching the joint unit 480 is formed on the back side of the plate-like portion below the ball feed opening 104, and glass is formed on the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 on the back side of the lower plate-like portion. An attachment receiving piece (not shown) for engaging the engaging protrusion 255 of the unit 250 is formed, and an attachment elastic piece 273 (to be described later) of the security cover 270 is attached to the side of the engagement receiving piece. An opening 110 is formed. In addition, an engagement protrusion 111 is formed in the center of the front surface of the plate-like portion so as to be inserted into a guide hole 456 (see FIG. 16) of the dish unit 300 described later. Furthermore, the lower side of the door frame main body 100 is a door frame protruding piece 112 protruding rearward. Constitutes the outer ridge and the engaging portion at the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

<Door lens unit>
Next, the door lens unit 12 attached to the upper part of the front side of the door frame main body 100 described above.
The configuration of 0 will be described. The door lens unit 120 includes a reflector having a front surface as a reflection surface, a cold cathode tube and an LED substrate attached to the front and inside of the reflector, a light-transmissive lens cover 150 covering the front of the reflector, and the lens cover 150. And a lens base body 121 serving as a base of the lens cover 150.

In the lens cover 150, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 in the lens base body 121 are formed of a transparent resin. And since the opening dimension of the game window 101 formed in the door frame main body 100 is formed larger than before, as described above, the dimension between the outer periphery of the door frame main body 100 and the inner periphery of the game window 101. In other words, since the dimensions for attaching the lens cover 150 (particularly the dimensions of the left and right sides) are narrow, the lens cover 150 in this embodiment includes the upper lens cover 151 and the side lens cover. All of the maximum forward projecting portions of the portions 156 and 157 have a wedge-shaped cross section in which the projecting size projecting forward is larger than the base size (the width size of the portion contacting the door frame body 100). ing. More specifically, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 are both formed as a white lens portion with a wedge-shaped front bulging portion formed of a synthetic resin, and the lower end portion of the white lens portion. A red lens portion formed of synthetic resin with different coloring is connected to the inside of the gaming window 101 to be bordered.

By the way, the upper lens cover portion 151 is formed in a wedge shape in a cross section with a hollow inside and opened at the rear, and is formed in a boomerang shape in a plan view. It is formed so that the distance between the cathode tube and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip is reduced. Further, an opaque leading molding member 154 colored in silver is fixed to the outer side of the wedge-shaped tip of the upper lens cover 151, and a front bulging surface having a wedge-shaped cross section corresponding to almost the entire upper lens cover 151 is formed. Illuminated with an upper cold cathode tube. Also, the side lens cover 156,
157 is an upper lens cover portion 15 in that the inside is hollow and the rear is open and formed in a wedge shape in cross section.
1 is a boomerang shape having a gentle curve as a whole and having a small amount of wedge-like protrusion in the side view compared to the upper lens cover portion 151, and is formed in the linear shape described above. It is formed so that the distance between the side cold-cathode tube and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip portion is close.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the reason why the cold cathode tube is used as the illumination means for decorating the periphery of the front surface of the door frame 5 is as follows. When decorating the periphery of the front surface of the door frame 5, there is a restriction that the distance between the light source and the lens cover disposed on the front surface of the light source cannot be made too large. This restriction is because the door frame 5 is always opened and closed.
This is because there is a risk of hindering work during opening. Thus, in a situation where the distance between the light source and the lens cover is not so large, the light decoration visible through the lens cover is continuous when the lamp or LED is scattered as the light source as in the past. The light decoration is not visible, but can only be seen as a spotted pattern with strong and weak parts. On the other hand, when a continuous cold cathode tube is used as a light emitting source as in this embodiment, even if the distance between the cold cathode tube and the lens cover 150 is short, the light decoration visible through the lens cover 150 is A beautiful light decoration in a continuous state is visible. For this reason, since the area surrounding the gaming board 4 is bordered by a continuous beautiful light decoration,
A decorative effect not found in conventional pachinko machines can be achieved. If the distance between the light source and the lens cover can be kept to some extent, light should diffuse and illuminate the entire area of the lens cover with little intensity even if scattered light sources such as LEDs are used. Can do.

Further, a decorative member attachment region 184 is formed below the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 of the lens cover 150, and the decorative member 185 is attached to the decorative member attachment region 184. The decorative member 185 has a shape similar to the speaker cover 165 described above, and when the lens cover 150 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the impression that the upper left and right sides and the lower left and right sides of the lens cover 150 are balanced. It is attached to give
Note that the speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 described above do not simply cover the front of the speaker 163 or decorate the lower part of the lens cover 150 as described above, but the periphery thereof is light-decorated with LEDs. It has a structure.

As described above in detail, the speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 according to the present embodiment have four corners in the region surrounding the game window 101 of the door frame 5 apart from the light decoration by the cold cathode tube and the LED substrate described above. Since it is configured so as to be intensively decorated with light, the entire circumference except for the lower side of the gaming window 101 is not casually decorated with light, but can be made with a light decoration with strength and weakness. In particular, the light decoration on the upper left and right sides of the door frame 5 has a tendency that only a speaker is conventionally arranged, and the light decoration around the speaker is not performed. However, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the entire periphery except the lower side of the gaming window 101 can be effectively decorated with light.

<Reinforcing sheet metal>
The door lens unit 120 described above is attached to the front side of the door frame main body 100, and the dish unit 300 is attached below the door lens unit 120. Here, before explaining the structure of the dish unit 300, the reinforcing sheet metal 210, the glass unit 250, the security cover 270, the mounting base 280, the frame decoration relay board 290, and the handle device 460 attached to the back side of the door frame main body 100.
Will be described sequentially. First, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18, 19 and 15 to 17.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 is attached along the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 211 that is attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame main body 100 and the rear side of the side of the shaft support side of the door frame main body 100. A pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 212, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 213 that is attached along the back of the open side of the door frame body 100, and a lower reinforcing sheet metal that is attached along the back of the lower side of the gaming window 101 of the door frame body 100. 214 are fastened with screws or the like to form a square shape.

As shown in FIG. 18, an upper shaft support portion 218 having a shaft pin 219 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 and a shaft pin 221 (
And a lower shaft support portion 220 having a structure (see FIG. 15). The upper and lower shaft pins 219 and 221 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the width dimension of the door frame main body 100, and the lower long side edge of the both long side edges is bent rearward. Lower bent piece 229
Although both upper side edges of the upper long side edge are upper bent protrusions 230 bent rearward, the portions sandwiched between the upper bent protrusions 230 on both sides are vertical. It becomes the vertical bending protrusion piece 231 extended in this. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229 is not so large, and the lower bent protrusion 229 does not engage with the groove or the recess to form the uneven engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusion 230 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229, and somewhat prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 214 is a vertical bent protrusion 231.

The vertical bent projecting piece 231 is formed in a concave shape so that the upper end edge shape thereof matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 described later.
So that the upper end piece of the vertical bent projecting piece 231 engages with an engagement groove 261 formed along the outer periphery of the center of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 in the width direction. (See FIG. 17). The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 228 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the door frame main body 100.

<Glass unit (transparent plate unit)>
Next, the glass unit 250 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the glass unit 250 has a gaming window 10.
An annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 251 molded from a synthetic resin having an opening larger than 1.
Then, two glass plates 262 (not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate) as a transparent plate may be adhered (with a hot melt adhesive) to the front and rear surfaces of the opening of the unit frame 251. It is comprised by. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the unit frame 251, the desiccant enclosure space part which encloses a desiccant inside is formed.

<Security cover>
Next, with respect to the crime prevention cover 270 that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 250 described above and is provided with a crime prevention function for preventing an unauthorized tool from entering the game board 4, FIG. 15, FIG. 17, FIG.
8 and FIG. As shown in the figure, the security cover 270 is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 250 between the left and right reinforcing sheet metals 212 and 213 with a transparent synthetic resin, and the upper side portion thereof is the inner side of the game board 4. It is formed as an arc-shaped contact recess 271 along the lower arc surface of the rail 603, and a post-crime prevention projection piece 274 protrudes rearward along the contact recess 271. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the pivot support side with the security cover 270 attached. Meanwhile, the glass unit 250 is attached to the front surface of the security cover 270 with the security cover 270 attached.
A pre-crime projection piece 272 is formed along the lower shape of the unit frame 251, and a mounting elastic piece 273 formed in a U shape at both ends of the lower portion is formed to project forward.

The security cover 270 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 273 in the mounting opening 110 formed in the door frame main body 100. And in the attached state, as shown in FIG. 17, the protrusion piece 272 before crime prevention faces the back lower one side of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 272 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 231. In addition, after the crime prevention piece 274
And the rear end protrusion 275 of the crime prevention is in a state protruding rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the half of the rear end of the crime prevention protrusion 274 is fixed to the game board 4. The lower side of the inner rail 603 enters the lower surface of the inner rail 603 and faces the inner rail 603, but the open half of the post-crime protruding piece 274 is inserted into the rail security groove 607 formed in the inner rail 603 of the game area partition frame member 601. And become
Further, the crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is superposed along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 30).

Thus, in the state in which the security cover 270 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 285 and the security space 586 described later, In addition to the crime prevention structure of the crime prevention cover 270, even if it is attempted to intrude an unauthorized tool from the lower side of the glass unit 250, the unauthorized access from the lower direction of the front surface of the crime prevention cover 270 is caused by the polymerization of the projection piece 272 before the crime prevention By preventing the post-crime protrusion 274 and the inner rail 603 constituting the game area partition frame member 601 from being superposed, intrusion of unauthorized tools from the rear lower direction of the security cover 270 is prevented. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from obliquely below the shaft support side of the door frame 5, the outer rail 6 is formed by a superposition structure of the security projection 608 and the security rear end projection 275.
The intrusion of the unauthorized tool into 02 is prevented, and further, the intrusion of the unauthorized tool into the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be prevented by the superposed structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime projection piece 274. Similarly, the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the obliquely lower side of the door frame 5 on the open side is the above-described open side reinforcing sheet metal 2.
In addition to the crime prevention structure by the 13 double bent protrusions 223 and 225, the intrusion of unauthorized equipment into the game area 605 of the game board 4 is further achieved by the uneven engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the post-crime protrusion 274. Can be blocked. The vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 274 and the rear-end protrusion 275 on the back side of the security cover 270 has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed.
And the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed in the above-mentioned manner, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball hitting or returning to the guide path part from colliding with the glass plate 262.

<Mounting base>
As shown in FIGS. 15, 18, and 19, the mounting base 280 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame main body 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 270. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. This mounting base 280
In order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the firing rail 515 to the game board 4, the firing rail 515 is sandwiched between the rear surface of the mounting base 280 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. For this reason, the ball flight guide surface 28 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting base 280.
6 is formed. By the way, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 281 that penetrates the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 228 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 at the upper part on the shaft support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is formed in the lower part of the open side to which the ball feed unit 287 is attached. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is a ball flight guide surface 286. Also, the ball feed unit mounting recess 28
The ball feed unit 287 attached to 2 is provided with a ball feed member that swings in response to the reciprocating motion difference of the hit ball 687 of the hit ball launching device 650 (ball launching means) described later. The ball at the lower end of the guide passage portion of the dish unit 300 is moved by the operation to launch the ball 515
Are supplied one by one to the launch position. Further, a lid opening 283 into which a finger can be put when a side opening lid 406 described later is removed is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 280. Further, an upright wall 284 is formed to stand vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting base 280. As shown in FIG. 15, the upright wall 284 is provided to restrict the lower portion of the security cover 270 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 270 when the security cover 270 is attached. is there.

Further, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment is characterized in that the security protrusion 285 is obliquely projected from the lower side of the above-described ball flight guide surface 286 to the prize ball passage opening 281 toward the rear. It is. As described above, the security projecting piece 285 is provided between the crime prevention space 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3, and the inner ridge and The engaging portion is configured.

<Frame decoration relay board>
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 18, a frame decoration relay board 290 is attached to the lower shaft support side of the mounting base 280, and the relay board cover 2 covering the rear surface of the frame decoration relay board 290.
91 is attached. The frame decoration relay board 290 is an electric part or electric part provided on the door frame 5 (cold cathode tube, LED board, speaker 163, switch provided in the operation handle 461, ball rental unit 327, operation ring unit 329. Etc.) are integrated and connected, and the prize ball payout control board via the door relay board 1102 etc. incorporated in the board unit 1100 to which the wiring from the frame decoration relay board 290 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 And the main board 2810 of the main board box 624 attached to the game board 4 (see FIG. 92).

<Dish unit>
Next, the configuration of the dish unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14, 18 and 19. The dish unit 300 is roughly divided into a unit frame 301 constituting an appearance, a lower speaker unit 340 attached to the inside of the unit frame 301, and an upper part of the lower speaker unit 340 so as to face the upper surface of the unit frame 301. , A second ball extraction link unit (not shown) for performing the ball extraction operation of the second ball extraction valve provided on the plate body 380, and a plate lid plate for closing the rear surface of the unit frame 301 450.

The unit frame 301 is provided with a ball rental unit 327. This rental unit 32
7 is provided with a switch for deriving a lending command, a remaining lending indicator, and the like when a ball lending machine is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Further, the unit frame 301 is provided with an operation ring unit 329 at the front center of the upper surface. The operation ring unit 32
9 is configured to have a button function 330 and a ring function 331. The button function 330 and the ring function 331 are used to play the game contents performed on the liquid crystal display device 640 provided on the game board 4. It is operated when a person participates.

Further, the dish unit 300 has a first ball removal button 316 on the right side of the upper surface of the unit frame 301.
And a second ball removal button 421 that constitutes a part of the second ball removal link unit is arranged at the lower center of the unit frame 301. In this embodiment, the two ball removal buttons 316 and 421, which are the first ball removal button 316 and the second ball removal button 421, are provided by storing the dish body 380 by operating the first ball removal button 316. Although all the spheres stored in the portion 381 and the guide passage portion can be removed, the operation of removing the spheres takes some time to remove the spheres arranged in a line in the guide passage portion 382. On the other hand, by operating the second ball removal button 421, the ball on the upstream side from the storage portion 381 of the dish body 380 can be quickly removed from the second ball extraction opening having a large diameter. Can be shortened. For this reason, it is possible to select the length of time for the player to take the ball.

In addition, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 57) may function and the payout operation may be stopped or the ballistic operation may be stopped and the game may not be able to continue despite being a big hit.
By operating the second ball removal button 421, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 can be removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position can be maintained and the game in the big hit can be continued. It has become.

<Handle device>
Next, the handle device 460 attached to the lower part of the door frame 5 on the open side is mainly shown in FIG.
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device 460 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided on the main body frame 3. The handle device 460 is assembled to an operation handle portion 461 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 on the open side, and the back surface of the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 461, and rotates according to the turning operation of the operation handle portion 461. And a joint unit 480 that cooperates with the rotating shaft 465 and changes the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 465 into a slide motion.

Although not shown, the handle device 460 is a micro switch that is turned on when the operation handle portion 461 is rotated, and a single button that turns the micro switch off when the micro switch is turned on. And a touch sensor for detecting contact of the player with the operation handle portion 461 through conductive plating applied to the outer peripheral surface of the operation handle portion 461. Then, when the player rotates the operation handle portion 461, the microswitch is turned ON and the touch sensor detects contact, a later-described launch motor 695 (see FIG. 37) of the hitting ball launcher 650 is rotationally driven. It has become so.
In addition, a cam formed in the shape of a ball is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 465, and the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 moves in the left-right direction by rotating this cam. .

As shown in FIG. 20, the slide movement of the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball hitting device 650, and the tension of the biasing spring 684 (see FIG. 37) of the ball hitting device 650 is increased. By adjusting, the strength of the urging force of the hitting ball rod 687 can be adjusted to obtain the ball hitting force desired by the player. The relationship between the handle device 460 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 650 is described.

[Body frame]
Next, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for delivering a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, and a ball path unit 770.
, A prize ball unit 800, a full unit 900, a locking device 1000 that locks the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and a door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 excluding the game board 4.
Various parts such as a board unit 1100 on which various control boards and power boards for controlling electrical parts provided on the board are collectively provided, a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580, and the like are mainly used for the main body frame. The main body frame 3 configured by being attached to 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

First, referring to FIGS. 21 to 29, main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted.
The main body frame 3 on which various parts are mounted will be described. FIG. 21 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching components, and FIG. 22 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching components.
FIG. 23 is a side view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching the components, and FIG. 24 is a perspective view seen from the rear surface of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching the components. FIG. 26 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 with the components attached, and FIG. 26 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 with the components attached to the outer frame 2. 27 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which components are attached, FIG. 28 is a perspective view seen from the rear surface of the main body frame 3 to which components are attached, and FIG. It is a cross-sectional top view of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected by the horizontal line of the box 624 part.

In FIG. 21, an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 (both see FIG. 25) for attaching and closing the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are mounted on one side of the body frame main body 500. In the state where the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502 are formed and the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502, the upper side and the side side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. Is substantially coplanar with the upper and side sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and side sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially coplanar with the lower and side sides of the lower shaft support 509 (FIG. 27). reference). Here, the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 27. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward, and a shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed to the upper surface protruding forward. A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side. On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 509 has an attachment portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500 and two support plates 5 on the lower end side and slightly above it.
06 and 507 are integrally projected. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is provided on the door frame 5. Door support plate 5 for supporting the lower shaft support part 220 on the main body frame 3
07 is constituted. Therefore, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the door support plate 507 is provided with the lower support portion 220 of the door frame 5. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 221 is formed.

By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 25) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side portion and the front open side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel with the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and on the inner side of the front opening side edge on the right side when viewed from the front. The rear end is the first side wall 540
A crime prevention recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall which is an inclined surface connected to the door frame 5, and the left side pivot support side portion on the left side when viewed from the front is different from the front upper side portion and the front open side portion. The shaft support side is not formed so as to have a predetermined width facing the back surface of the main body frame, but the front shaft support side portion of the main body frame main body 500 has a larger forward protrusion than the front top side portion and the front open side surface portion. Part 587.

More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side of the front surface is bent toward the rear with both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 211 attached and fixed to the rear side of the upper side of the door frame 5. The bent projecting pieces 215 and 216 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back at the long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 213 attached and fixed to the open back of the door frame 5. The open-side outer bent protrusion 223 and the open-side inner bent protrusion 225 to be bent are respectively inserted.
Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 217 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact.
Further, the above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where fraud is likely to occur. Of course, the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 212 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 217 also functions sufficiently, but in many cases the support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is larger than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook 1041 (provided on a locking device 1000 to be described later) attached to the back surface of the body frame 3 on the open side.
67), a door hook hole 549 is formed to protrude forward, and engages with a positioning recess 611 formed on the game board 4 on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. A board positioning projection 576 is provided for this purpose. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projecting piece 217 of the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 212 with the door frame 5 closed on the inner front surface of the board positioning projection 576 on the side side of the front pivot side is slightly lower. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the distal ends are inserted project. The operation of the restricting protrusion 577 is as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side plane portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate part 511 is a game board placement part 512 for placing the game board 4, and the game board 4 is placed on the placement part 512 in the approximate center of the game board placement part 512. A passage support protrusion 513 is provided to support the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 30) formed in the game board 4 when placed. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the end on the open side at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 25) is fixed with screws. In addition, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and the game board installation recess 5
When the game board 4 is installed at 10, the game board 4 is adjacent to the connection passage portion 609 (see FIG. 30) which is the downstream end of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4. In addition, at the side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515), the upper end of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 25) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 is provided. Fixture mounting boss 5 for mounting
17 protrudes and a stopper 518 protrudes obliquely below. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is provided to be rotatable about the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512 to play the game. The board fixture 519 is replaced with the game board 4
The game board 4 is fixed by pressing the front of the game board. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it.
In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that projects in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This point will be described in detail later. A handle connecting window 522 that houses a slide member 710 (see FIG. 41) that is associated with the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 described above is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 is formed at the position adjacent to the connecting window 522 so that the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 37) of the ball striking rod 687 faces. Further, on the upper wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520, a hitting ball 687 of the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided.
槌 through opening 521 for projecting upward is formed, and a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes is opened on the front surface of the plate portion 511 obliquely above the 槌 through opening 521. Yes.

On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, as shown in FIG. 22, a ball discharge passage 524 that extends from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then goes downward is formed. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 25), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 into the island. Further, a cylindrical guide projection 525 protrudes rearward above the launching device mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 73) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is inserted into the guide projection 525. This facilitates the mounting of the substrate unit 1100. Also, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left, right, top and bottom of the plate portion 511. The mounting holes 5
27 is attached to the mounting piece 1122 of the substrate unit 1100 with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with a ball extraction connection opening 530 that is an opening at the upstream end of the ball extraction discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. Yes. The downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. A portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is a full unit 900 (FIG. 25) described in detail later.
The full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting the reference unit) is formed in a horizontal shape so as to be orthogonal to the plate portion 511, and an engagement piece of the full unit 900 is provided at the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with 924 (see FIG. 57) is formed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame 5 is provided on the front surface of the plate portion 511 in front of the full unit mounting portion 531.
There is provided an outlet opening / closing device 579 for blocking a prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 at the time of opening. Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. In addition, FIG.
As shown in the figure, a fastening hole 533 that penetrates in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper part of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. A fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 has a first side wall 54 that is provided around the rear side from the inner side surface on the pivot support side and the upper side portion and the open side surface portion on the open side.
0, a second side wall 541 provided around the rear from the first side wall 540, and the second side wall 54
1 and a fourth side wall 543 provided rearward from the third side wall 542, the left and right sides of the main body frame 3 and the rear part of the upper side are It is formed in the enclosed concave shape. The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 29) that is inclined inwardly from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done. At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is performed using a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 63) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. Therefore, the first side wall 5 on the open side is also used to form the lock mounting hole 547.
40 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed in an inclined step shape. Further, the first side wall 540
The step size of the fourth side wall 543 is the same as that of the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541.
Since it is necessary to come into contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 to be described later, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

Then, as shown in FIG. 23, the side walls 540 to 543 described above are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, and in this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d.
3 + d4 = about 135 mm. In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided in 4 are accommodated. In other words, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the back of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts the rear side wall of the gaming device 4 that extends from the first side wall 540 toward the rear substantially in parallel with the first side wall 540 and is provided on the game board 4. It constitutes. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. And the rear wall 722 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720. Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 to the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, Upper rear wall 545
And the axial support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall is projected inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 21), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably attached to the rear surface. It is like that. Therefore, the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the pivot support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are wide enough to be attached. Further, the front surface of the upper rear wall 545 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 21), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface thereof. Therefore, the protruding width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 is
It is sufficient if there is a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 21), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear edge of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even in the case where a gaming device in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the gaming board 4 is attached, The rear projecting portion can be easily stored. The open side rear wall 544,
Inside the upper rear wall 545 and the pivot side rear wall 546 is a rear opening 580, and the rear opening 580 is closed by a cover body 1250, which will be described later.

Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board installation recess 510 will be described.
In the plane portion on the open side, there are three upper, middle, and lower door hook holes 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes, but above the upper and lower door hook holes 549. A locking hole 548 (FIG. 22) in which a locking projection 1004 described later of the locking device 1000 is engaged in the middle and lower.
Reference) is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 22) for performing the attachment with a screw is an upper part of the rear end portion of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the middle. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only at the upper and middle positions, but also at a screw mounting portion 1003 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and a lock mounting hole formed near the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing 547 to 547 with screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the mounting flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, as shown in FIG.
The 20 notches 729 communicate with the escape recess 551 and function so as not to cause ball clogging by releasing pressure when the ball pressure of the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 increases. When the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 5). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15
Is formed in order to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

In addition, a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 is formed in the upper rear wall 545 described above along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 5
43 and a rail engaging groove 554 are formed at the bent portions of the upper rear wall 545. Then, the locking protrusions 749 and 750 of the tank rail member 740 (see FIG.
5), the tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3. Further, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper portion of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. The projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 74 is engaged.
Rail retaining elastic piece 55 so that the locked state is not released when 0 is attached to the body frame 3.
5 contacts the upper end of the downstream side of the tank rail member 740. When the tank rail member 740 is removed, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pushed backward, and then the tank rail member is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 and the locking protrusions 749 and 750. What is necessary is just to lift 740 upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail hooking elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 is formed below the rail hooking elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground connector 207 is attached to the inside of the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board is connected.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, the pivot side rear wall 546 has a pivot side rear wall 546.
Vertical standing walls 560 are erected on both right and left ends of the ball passage unit 770 between the standing walls 560.
And a prize ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guide projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The prize ball guiding projection 561 is projected rearward on the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that its projecting height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. This corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 50) of the ball passage unit 770 and guides the winning balls in a line. Further, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 50). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

Furthermore, an engagement protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-shaped engagement portion 824 (see FIG. 52) as an engagement portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, Elastic claw 56 for locking that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 52) of the prize ball unit 800
4 and the rotating shaft 808 of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 (
A clearance hole 566 is formed in which an end portion (see FIG. 52) is received. A payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as a drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 25). Then, the prize ball unit 800 includes the pivot support side rear wall 546.
The lower end of the locking groove 573 formed at the lowermost end of the rear surface is locked, and is detachably attached to the shaft support side rear wall 546 by the engaging protrusion 565 and the locking elastic claw 564. . This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which an open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546. A locking wall 569 protrudes downward. In the cover body contact groove 567, stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 (see FIG. 28) of the cover body 1250 are formed.
253 and 568 are aligned with each other and fastened with screws (not shown), so that the cover body 1250
Thus, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed. The locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 that is U-shaped in plan view. Through the formed through hole 1254 (see FIG. 28), for example, a lock such as a padlock can be used.
By hooking on 70, only the person in charge having the padlock key can open the cover 1250.

As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 has been demonstrated, when the door frame 5 is closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, door frame protrusions 112 and 113 (FIG. 19) which are bent with the lower side of the door frame main body 100 facing rearward.
Engaging grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 21) into which the reference is inserted are formed. Engagement groove 58
Reference numeral 4 denotes a groove formed below the launcher mounting portion 520 described above, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 112 corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 113 corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protrusion 112 with a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protrusions 112 and 113 and the engagement groove 5
84 and 585 constitute the outer ridge and the engaging portion at the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project, but the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the launching device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are arranged to the open side is the rear surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion 520 and launch rail 51
Since the front surface of the door frame 5 is in close contact with each other, an illegal tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement groove 585 can be removed from the rear surface of the door frame 5 and the launcher mounting portion. It is extremely difficult to pass between the front surface of the game board 4 or the back surface side of the game board 4 by further skillfully passing between the 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515.

On the other hand, since the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side does not have a portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, the door frame 5 is closed. In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 280 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 has the door frame 5 in a closed state. A security protrusion 285 that enters 586 is formed. The security protrusion 285 has a plate portion 51.
1 is formed on the mounting base 280 so as to extend from approximately the middle of 1 to the end of the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the launch rail 515 and the outer rail 602 attached to the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention projection piece 285 protruding from the mounting base 280. The security projection piece 285 and the security space 586 constitute an inner ridge and engagement portion in the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 9.
00, the lock device 1000, the substrate unit 1100, and the cover body 1250 are attached.

<Schematic configuration of game board>
A schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35. 30 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 31 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 32 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. FIG. 34 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 35 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure on the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. FIG.

In FIG. 30, the game board 4 includes a substantially square panel holder 600 holding a game panel 599, and a game area partition frame member 601 attached to the front surface of the panel holder 600 so as to surround the game area 605. ing. On the surface of the game panel 599, various game devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 605. The game area partition frame member 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 600 after those gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided. The game area partition frame member 601 is attached to the game panel 59.
9 is formed in the shape of a circular cavity so as to surround the periphery of 9, and the outer shape is formed in a shape along the outer shape of the panel holder 600, and an arc extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side A surface is formed as the outer rail 602, and the position from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of the outer rail 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow preventing member 604 of the upper stopper 620 is provided is the inner rail 603. Is formed. The outer rail 602 is connected to a rail connection member 516 provided at the start end of the outer rail 602 as an extension of the firing rail 515.
9 is formed in an oblique shape, and a foul port 610 is formed adjacent to the connection passage portion 609. A metal rail is attached in close contact with the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stopper 620. In addition, when the hit ball which slid on the outer rail 602 vigorously collides with the hitting part 620, the hit ball hits the game area 605.
An elastic body made of rubber or synthetic resin is provided so as to repel the inside of the ball, and the backflow prevention member 604 is fired once so that the hit ball taken inside the game area 605 does not flow back to the outer rail 602 again. It is something to prevent. Furthermore, on the lower side of the outer rail 602,
A security protrusion 608 is provided so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. This security protrusion 60
8, in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, as described above, the crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 protruding from the crime prevention cover 270 overlaps the vertical direction of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. This prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap.

Further, an out port 606 is provided at the lower center of the inner rail 603, and the out port 60
Between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from 6 to the backflow prevention member 604 constitutes a guide passage through which the hit ball is guided to the game area 605, but the game area 605
The striking ball that has flowed back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the point is taken into the foul port 610, guided to a foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900, which will be described later, and discharged to the dish unit 300 again. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. Further, a rail crime prevention groove 607 is formed in the game area partition frame member 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the stop portion 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 274 protruding from the security cover 270 enters as described above with the door frame 5 closed. Rail security groove 60
Intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from the middle of the gap on the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 overlapping in the vertical direction due to the concave-convex engagement of the post 7 and the post-crime projection piece 274 Is finally prevented.

By the way, a positioning recess 611 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to fit in the board positioning projection 576 formed on the main body frame 3, and is formed on the main body frame 3 on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when the game board stopper 614 is pressed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, the game board 4 is entirely inserted after the positioning recess 611 is inserted from the front side of the main body frame 3 in an oblique direction so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 576. Is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 614 which is in a free state in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end thereof is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. Thereafter, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

By the way, the game board 4 in this embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 very easily. That is, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 34, a mounting notch 616 that penetrates the game board 4 in the front and rear direction is formed at the lower end opposite to the passage notch 613 below the game board 4 (exactly). In the game area partition frame member 601, an attachment notch 616 is formed.) A fastening bar 617 is stretched and fixed horizontally below the attachment notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a belt groove-like fastening portion 618 for latching the fastening band 619 at the approximate center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, it is the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3, and the firing rail 515 is fired. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the portion, and a fastening linkage 534 for hooking the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 35). ).

When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 512 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 are in a matched state. In this state, the fastening bar 617 is attached to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 coincide.
The tip of a fastening band 619 that is generally marketed from above is inserted into the mounting notch 616 and directed downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and the tip engages with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. Let And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut,
The game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixture 519 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, illegal removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

Further, the outer shape of the game board 4 has speaker cutouts 612 formed on the upper left and right sides of the game board 4 so as to receive the rear protruding portions of the speakers 163 provided on the back surface of the door frame 5, and the side of the foul mouth 610. A notch portion 613 for passage into which a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted is formed obliquely below. In addition, the game area partition frame member 6
On the lower left and right sides of 01, there is provided a certificate sticking unit 615 for attaching a certificate confirmation certificate.

On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, a winning is obtained by aligning and guiding the balls won in various gaming devices provided in the gaming area 605 (for example, a winning opening such as a big winning opening device or a general winning opening) on the downstream side. A space forming cover body 621 is attached, and a display device control board for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display device 640 (see FIG. 74) disposed on the back surface of the winning space forming cover body 621 at substantially the center of the game area 605. A liquid crystal display control board box 622 as a display control board box to be housed is attached.

Further, on the back surface of the game board 4, a board substrate holder 62 is provided below the winning space forming cover body 621.
3 is fixed. This board substrate holder 623 has a space portion (a width of the space portion in the front-rear direction is the width of the winning space forming cover body 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the winning space forming cover body 621 in the front thereof. It is formed as a relatively wide one.)
A drop port 629 (see FIG. 29) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 to be described later.
It communicates with the out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 73) formed in the above. The board substrate holder 623 has a main board box 624 for storing a main board 2810 (see FIG. 92) for controlling the game operation on the back surface thereof, a payout control board 1186 and a power board provided in the board unit 1100 described later. And a relay terminal plate 625 for connecting to the like.
On the relay terminal board 625, the drawer connector 6 automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 simply by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.
26, 627 are provided. Further, the board connector 623 has a drawer connector 62.
A joining guide protrusion 628 that protrudes rearward from between the terminals 6 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625 is formed. The joint guide protrusion 628 is provided on the game board 4 as will be described in detail later.
Board unit 1100 so that the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 provided on the game board 4 side are naturally connected to each other when the operation of attaching the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is performed. It is inserted into a joining guide hole 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 1100 (see FIG. 73). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

<Hitball launcher>
The ball striking device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 is a perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball launcher 650, a perspective view (B) with the firing motor part removed, and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching device 650, FIG. The hitting ball launcher 65
FIG. 39A is a front view showing the relationship between 0 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the firing motor portion. FIG. 39 is a ball striking device 650 in a state where the operation handle portion 461 is not operated.
FIG. 40 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball striking device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 461 is operated, and FIG. , A plan view (A) of a slide member 710 provided in the ball hitting device 650,
It is the front view (B), the perspective view (C) seen from the front, and the AA sectional view (D) of the front view (B).

The hitting ball launching device 650 rotatably supports the hitting ball rod 687 on the launching base frame 651, and attaches a shooting motor 695 for reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the urging force of the urging spring 684 that imparts the urging force that returns to the position.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, the launch base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape by a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at substantially the center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper portion and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. Also, the launch base frame 65
1 is formed in a laterally elongated groove-like slide guide hole 655 above the rear side (the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the launch rail 515), and a slide member storage space 656 is formed below the slide guide hole 655. Yes. The slide guide hole 655 is used for guiding a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding from the upper rear end of the slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. Further, as shown in FIG. 38, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656.

Further, a hook portion is formed with respect to the main body of the launch base frame 651 at a front portion of the upper side of the launch base frame 651, and an operating piece opening 657 is formed in the hook portion above the bearing cylinder 652. ing. The operating piece opening 657 abuts on a supply swing piece 289 (see FIG. 15) provided facing a hitting ball supply port 288 (see FIG. 15) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. A mounting portion 6 in which the operating piece 658 protrudes from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the opening 657 for the operating piece.
60 is swingably provided by a stop pin 659. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with the operating piece abutting portion 693 provided to project, and the upper side portion swings the supply swing piece 289 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball rod 687. Balls flowing out from the supply port 288 are supplied one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 515.

Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. In addition, a slide rod 67 is provided at the lower rear of the slide member storage space 656.
The shaft hole 6 at the lower end of the swing piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 for sliding the slide 7
A oscillating piece boss 663 into which 73 is inserted projects.

A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hitting ball launcher 650 has high rigidity. Therefore, the metal plate 665 has through holes 666, 667, and 668 corresponding to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively.
, 669, 671 are formed, and a horizontally long elliptical through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also penetrated. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, each of the through holes 666 to 671 has corresponding members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712.
It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by screwing it in close contact with the firing base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match 663.

The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. The swing piece 672
As shown in FIG. 37, it is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, the shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex part 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof.
Is formed. The front surface above the connection hole 674 is an abutting portion 675 that abuts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Accordingly, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663 and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swing piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

Further, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 protruding from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665 so that the slide rod 6
A guide bush 681 having a set screw 682 is passed through a guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of 77, and the set screw 682 is fixed to the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

A bearing cylinder 652 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached is formed in the through hole 66.
The bearing 665 of the ball striking rod 687 is fitted to the bearing cylinder 652 so as not to fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and, at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. The base plate 690 is provided with an operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 on the front back surface side thereof, and the front front surface of the base plate 690 is used to latch the locking ring 686 on the other end of the biasing spring 684. A spring locking portion 692 is provided in a projecting manner, and a motor contact projecting piece 691 that engages with and disengages the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is provided in a projecting manner on the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687.
8 enters a firing position formed by a lower end portion of the firing rail 515 and a firing position stopper 702 fixed above the firing rail 515.

On the other hand, the motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651 has a motor cover 694.
A firing motor 695 housed in is attached. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and is enlarged in front of the cylindrical portion to attach the motor. And an anti-rotation preventing cam 698 and a motor cam at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 formed integrally with an attaching portion in which an attachment fixing hole 699 for attaching to the boss 661 is formed. 697 is fixed. A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698. The reverse rotation prevention cam 698 is engaged with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 39) fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. Prevents reverse rotation. This is because the motor cam 697 rotates in the reverse direction, and the motor cam 697 and the motor contact protrusion 691 mesh with each other to hit the ball hitting device 65.
This is to prevent a failure in which 0 cannot be driven from occurring. The motor cam 6
97 is formed in the shape of a ball, and the motor abutting protrusion 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates.
The hitting ball 687 is reciprocated while being engaged and disengaged. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), the main configuration of the hit ball launching device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

By the way, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moved is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open as shown in FIG. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on the upper surface and the lower surface, a slide member storage space 656 is provided.
Sliding contact protrusions 713 having a circular arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide inside. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 7 into which the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 provided at the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted.
14 Thus, the insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes inward from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface slightly toward the rear of the first inclined surface 715. A sandwiching piece 716 is formed and provided with a predetermined interval between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, the slide protrusion 492 is inserted into the insertion space 7.
14, the inclined side 4 of the sliding protrusion 492 is formed as shown in FIG.
One end side on the 93 side is in a state of being in contact with the side wall in the sliding direction and being inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing a function.

Therefore, the slide member 710 configured as described above has the slide member storage space 65.
As shown in FIG. 38A, the insertion space 714 is formed so that the insertion space 714 faces the elliptical connection opening 664 formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656. The member 710 is in contact with one inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. 38A, it is shown as contacting the left inner wall, but in the normal state, the right inner wall It is in a state of being in contact with.

First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball striking device 650 will be described. The slide member 710 has a right position at the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (FIG. 38A). 39, the swing piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 677 that is in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 39) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocatingly rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position in the slide member storage space 656 (when moving toward the left inner wall in FIG. 38A),
As shown in FIG. 40, since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679 (see FIG. 40). In FIG. 40, it slides and moves in the right direction). Then, the spring locking portion 6 of the slide rod 677
The urging spring 684 locked to 83 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the firing position is increased. The game area 605 of the game board 4 is reached by being strongly bulleted. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the slide amount of the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656.

As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the hitting ball launching device 650. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 483 of the joint unit 480 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 464. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, when the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 of the handle device 460 is rotated, the slanting cam 466 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 465 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 480 483 slides and moves in one direction inside the storage body 481. For this reason, the slide protrusion 492 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 483 also slides in the same direction. Slide protrusion 49 of slide body 483
2 is inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710 through the connection opening 664 formed in the launcher mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. It has become. In this case, the inserted state is the inclined side 4 of the slide protrusion 492 as described above.
In this state, one end side on the 93 side is in contact with the side wall in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. Accordingly, when the slide protrusion 492 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, the slide rod 677 is moved along with the slide movement of the slide member 710.
Since the sliding movement also occurs, the urging force of the urging spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, the ball hitting device 650 is operated by rotating the rotation operation member 464 of the handle device 460.
It is possible to adjust the resilience of the hit ball.

By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 460 is provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided in the main body frame 3, the handle device 460 is provided every time the door frame 5 is opened and closed.
The slide projecting piece 492 and the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 is inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710.
The handle device 460 and the ball striking device 650 are automatically inserted into each other, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 moves away from the insertion space 714 and handles. Since the device 460 and the ball hitting device 650 can be separated from each other, the handle device 460 and the ball hitting device 650 can be linked and separated with the opening and closing of the door frame 5 very easily. In particular, when the slide protrusion 492 is inserted into the insertion space 714, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 that protrudes into the insertion space 714 even if the position of the slide protrusion 492 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction. The slide projection 492 is smoothly inserted into the clamping position by the surface 717.

In some cases, the player may stuff the padding operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent, but the store clerk at the game hall knows the padding without knowing the padding. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the sliding protrusion 492 is simply separated from the insertion space 714. However, the door frame 5
Although the position of the slide projecting piece 492 is slightly shifted in one direction when closing, the cooperative action of the inclined side 493 of the slide projecting piece 492 and the first inclined surface 715 of the slide member 710 The slide protrusion 492 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged with each other while the slide member 710 is moved in one direction in accordance with the closing operation of the door frame 5. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 460 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can cooperate with each other regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461. It is.

<Prize ball tank>
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 is mainly shown in FIG.
This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 24) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. The prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and is viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1,
A cutout 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface of the front wall 721 extends from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 7.
23, a first inclined bottom surface 726 that inclines toward 23 and a front wall 721 to be described below.
A storage portion 728 is formed by the second inclined bottom surface 727 that is inclined toward zero. In addition, a discharge port 730 is formed at the lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and this discharge port 73 is formed.
0 is surrounded by a discharge port protruding wall 725 that connects the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 in a U-shape so as to protrude outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. It is formed to be. In addition, outside the both ends of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720,
A mounting abutment portion 733 that engages with the tank mounting groove 550 is formed, and a mounting contact piece that is mounted on the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720. 73
1, 732 protrudes, and further, a ball leveling attachment shaft 735 for mounting a ball leveling member 744, which will be described later, protrudes from the lower portion of the rear wall 722 upstream of the prize ball tank 720. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 is used.
The mounting flange 733 is mounted so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 732 are mounted.
Is brought into contact with the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed and attached to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 8, the reservoir 728 communicates with the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3 through the notch 729 of the front wall 721, and the discharge port 730 is formed as shown in FIG. 5. It faces the upstream end of a tank rail member 740 to be described next. Accordingly, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 for storing the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to the 4th side wall 543, and it is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543. Thus, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are formed deep so as to cover the rearward projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, and therefore the side wall 541 thereof. Although the depth of the storage part of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of ˜543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. 720 as a whole is the side wall 5 of the main body frame 3.
Since it supports by 42-543, the stored ball | bowl can be smoothly guide | induced to the discharge port 730, without the inclined bottom faces 726 and 727 deform | transforming. In addition, the discharge port 730 has a prize ball tank 7.
20, the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 is configured to flow outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to obtain a structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 720 is placed on the outside of the upper portion of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodates the rearward projecting portions of the gaming apparatus, and the award is given. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage unit, the tank rail member 740 is disposed outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 720 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protrusion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

Further, the rear side wall 5 in which the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 houses the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus.
Regardless of whether or not it is placed on the upper outer side of 41-543, the conventional prize ball tank is merely configured such that the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720. It has a unique effect that is not available. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 shows conventional prize ball tanks (A) and (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to this embodiment.
It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the bulb | ball in the discharge port part. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion as in a conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG.
A prize ball tank in which a discharge port 730A is formed on the side opposite to A, or a discharge port 730B that is formed adjacent to the ball breaking projection 736B as shown in FIG. 730A
, 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the outlets 730A, 730B from four directions by the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure. For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced due to the degree of sphere overlap, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the outlets 730A and 730B, and the sphere may be clogged. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to the present embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, so FIG.
), The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 is from the storage unit to the discharge port 7.
The pressure is from only two directions, that is, the acting force toward 30 directions and its reaction, and it does not receive pressure from four directions as in the prior art. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state at the discharge port 730 portion, and an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur can be achieved.

<Tank rail member>
The tank rail member 740 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 46 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball path unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 24) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 is provided so as to be hooked on the rail locking groove 554 from above. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in a slanted bowl shape having an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, the inside of the tank rail member 740 serves as a passage 742 through which the spheres flow down in two rows by the partition wall 741 as shown in FIG. The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign substances that roll along the passage 742 together with the ball fall downward from the narrow groove. In addition, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 22). Yes. For this reason, the tank rail member 7
The static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down 40 is grounded from the metal plate via the ground wire connector 557 to the outside via the ground connector of the power supply board.

In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the passages 742 in the two rows of the tank rail members 740. The spheres that are suspended and flow down the respective passages 742 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Also,
The upper surface of the tank rail member 740 downstream from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is the ball holding plate 7.
45. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step. Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. Therefore, each passage 74 of the tank rail member 740
When the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down 2 flows down to the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 742 are engaged with the alignment gears 747 and are arranged in two rows of passages 7.
42 is guided in a central direction along an inclined surface 743 formed at the lower part of 42, and during the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of the passages 742 are introduced into the upper end inlet 773 of the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. It is designed to fall alternately in a line. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

<Ball passage unit>
A ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the winning ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 51. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 49 is a perspective view seen from the back of the ball passage unit 770, FIG.
FIG. 51 is a front view of the ball passage unit 770, and FIG. 51 is a side view for explaining a connection structure between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 48 and 49, the prize ball unit 800 portion is a drawing of the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 in an easy-to-understand manner, with the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat sink 841 and the unit sub plate 825 removed. is there. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

In the spherical passage unit 770, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent to the back surface of a substantially rectangular plate (the surface seen from the back surface is referred to as the front surface). As shown in FIG. 46A, the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front / rear bent passage portion 772a. It consists of a left and right bent passage portion 772b bent in the left and right direction (left and right direction when viewed from the back) and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portion 772b and having a substantially vertical shape.
As shown in FIG. 46 (A), the front / rear bent passage portion 772a has the tank rail member 74 described above.
Since the position of the upper end inlet 773 dropping from 0 is substantially the center of the two rows of passages 742 as described above, it is a position away from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 and the pivot support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to the rear side. Therefore, the ball drop passage 772 is positioned close to the surface of the shaft-supporting rear wall 546 by the front / rear bending passage portion 772a and the prize ball guiding projection 561 protruding from the shaft-supporting rear wall 546. It bends in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 50, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed in a U shape so as to be almost full of the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the spheres that have fallen from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending. Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, it is slightly curved and formed, and a cutout portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball piece detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator 779 is pushed to turn on the ball piece switch 778. When no ball is present in the portion 772c due to clogging or ball deficiency, the ball piece detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, and the actuator 779 turns off the ball piece switch 778. The ball break switch 778 is OF
At F, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, stops and the payout of the prize ball is stopped. In addition, at the lower end portion of the notch portion 775, a ball breakage detecting piece 77 is provided.
A stopper projection 780 is formed to prevent excessive swinging to the opposite side of the passage portion 6 and a vertical passage portion 772c corresponding to the ball breakage detecting piece 776 of the ball passage unit 770.
A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed on the surface. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 is inserted into a pin from the rear side of the ball path unit 770 when the ball breakage detecting piece 776 is difficult to swing due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball piece detecting piece 776 is formed in a bulging shape slightly toward the ball piece detecting piece 776 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage 772c, the ball breakage detecting piece 776 is surely pressed and the ball breakage switch 778 is turned on.
It is to make it.

Further, the ball passage unit 770 has a stop hole 7 at a position avoiding the above-described ball dropping passage 772.
82 and a positioning boss 783 are formed. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3.
Corresponds to the passage unit mounting boss 562 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546. Thus, to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 47, the passage unit attachment boss 5 is engaged while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574.
62 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other, and a screw 784 is screwed into the stop hole 782 in this state. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with an engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

As shown in FIG. 49, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in an arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 The projecting shaft 789 as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 787 serving as the shaft support projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting lid 786. Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the ball passage unit 770 by closing, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end portion of the ball dropping passage 772 communicate with each other (see FIG. 51B). The state shown in FIG. 51) and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball dropping passage 772 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 51A). A guide projection 791 that guides the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3,
In addition, as described later, in a state where the prize ball unit 800 is similarly mounted on the pivot side rear wall 546 (the state shown in FIG. 51A), the coupling lid member 786 is closed and the latch provided on the prize ball unit 800 is provided. By locking the rear surface of the ball passage unit 770 with the elastic claw 820, the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 and the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 are communicated with each other through the passage wall 790, and the ball drop passage of the ball passage unit 770 is connected. The ball that falls on 772 can be guided to the bending path 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball passage unit 770 is that the award ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide projection 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is located substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, the award ball unit 8 alternately turns the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747.
In the configuration of sending to the 00 side, the balls can be smoothly sent to the winning ball unit 800 one by one through the ball dropping passage 772. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

Further, the sphere that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . In addition, the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably detect a break in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, a break in the ball supplied to the winning ball unit 800 (a ball break).

<Prize ball unit>
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55. 52 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800. FIG. 53 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member. FIG. 55 is a rear view for explaining the path and drive relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 55 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

In FIG. 52, a prize ball unit 800 (ball payout means) includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent passage 803, a prize ball passage 810, and a ball removal passage 811 are formed by a pair of bent passage walls 802. , A unit sub-plate 8 covering the rear surface of the unit base body 801
25 and the relay board 830 attached to the upper surface (rear side) of the unit sub-plate 825
And a gear group 8 provided in a substantially central surface region (rear side region) of the unit sub-plate 825.
43, 844, 847 and a gear cover 866 covering the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member)
It consists of and. Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to the middle of the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. Further, a portion where the middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into right and left is a distribution space 8 in which a sprocket 807 as a ball feed rotating body is arranged.
05, and a passage partition wall 809 is formed so as to project from the lower part of the distribution space 805 to the downstream end of the unit base body 801 so as to form a pair of the bent passage walls 802 divided into the left and right. That is, the left and right bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage is the prize ball passage 81.
0 and the other passage constitutes a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is housed and fixed in a motor housing space 814 that is located at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Is done. The bent passage 80
3 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of the spheres staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805. An elliptical shape is formed on the bottom surface upstream of the distribution space 805. A shaped opening 804 is formed. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

In the distribution space 805 described above, a plurality of balls (three in the illustrated example) in which spheres fit on the outer periphery.
A sprocket 807 serving as a payout member in which a recess is formed is rotatably arranged. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotating shaft 808 to which the sprocket 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Has been. Further, the passage partition wall 8 constituting the bottom of the distribution space 805
The upper end portion of 09 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and a payout ball detection sensor 812 is detachably attached to an upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof. . The payout ball detection sensor 812 is a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor in which a circular passage hole through which a ball passes is formed at the tip, and a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end.
By being formed of the bent passage wall 802, it can be easily attached and detached. Note that wiring (not shown) from the payout ball detection sensor 812 is connected to a relay board 830 described later.
To be connected to. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, a plurality of locking claws 813
Among them, a locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is accommodated in the inside. However, the payout motor 815 has a screw 817 on the back side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 by a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof.
It comes to be fixed with. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed. In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 described above are formed by covering the rear side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Then, a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815.
And the above-described distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 is disposed are formed in a very close positional relationship in the vertical direction, so that the length of the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction can be shortened. The prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball, which has been extracted at the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction passage 811, to the back side of the prize ball unit 800.
The sphere guided to 19 is guided to a ball outlet connecting passage 880 described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is mounted on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A button insertion engagement hole 821 and a hook-like engagement portion 824 for detachably attaching to the rear wall 546;
An attachment boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is provided. The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801 and is attached with a rod-like detachable button 822 slidably in the depth width direction. This corresponds to the elastic lock claw 564 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Also, the button insertion engagement hole 8
As shown in FIG. 47, the rear end surface of 21 has a concave shape so that the front end of the locking elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In this engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821
Are engaged, so that the upward movement of the prize ball unit 800 cannot be performed. Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. Also,
A mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear side, and the unit sub-plate 82
5, after passing through the through hole 858 drilled in 5, the screw 868 is screwed from the surface of the gear cover 866 so as to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866, thereby
The unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are connected in a state where the 25 is sandwiched.

The configuration of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat radiating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. A relay board region 826 for attaching the relay board 830 is formed on the top side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, and a plurality of gears 843, 844, 847 and detection are formed below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which the disk 850 is attached is formed. The relay substrate region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for mounting the relay substrate 830 are provided along the square shape, and a substrate cover 835 (described later) is provided above and below one side of the side. An engaging groove portion 828 that engages with the mating protrusion 836 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with the locking projection 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. Further, the relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attach / detach button 822 is inserted and an attachment boss part 832 for fixing the relay board 830 with screws (not shown).

The relay board 830 attached to the relay board area 826 is a prize ball unit 800.
Relays the wiring from the above-described payout ball detection sensor 812, the payout motor 815, and the sensor 855 described later, and the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 25 and 72) described later. Are provided with a plurality of connectors and a detachable button 82.
A button insertion hole 833 through which 2 is inserted and a mounting hole 831 corresponding to the mounting boss portion 832 are formed. Thus, the relay board 830 is mounted on the mounting rib 827 in the relay board area 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown). It can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the plate 825.

Further, the relay board 830 attached as described above is covered with a board cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape with a substantially square front side open,
An engaging protrusion 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of the one vertical side, and a locking protrusion 83 is provided on the substantially central side surface of the other vertical side.
7 is formed. Further, a button opening 83 is formed on a square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835.
8 and a connection opening 839 are formed. Thus, the engagement protrusion 83 of the substrate cover 835
6 is inserted into the engaging groove portion 828 of the relay board region 826 and engaged, and then the latching protrusion 837 and the latching claw part 829 are engaged to easily cover the relay board 830 with the board cover 835. be able to. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled obliquely toward the front side to engage the engagement projection 83.
6 and the engagement groove portion 828 can be disengaged. In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Also,
The wiring connected to the relay substrate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839.

Next, gears 843, 8 provided in a gear region 840 formed in the unit sub-plate 825.
44 and 847 and the detection disk 850 will be described. As described above, the dispensing motor 81
The tip of the motor shaft 818 of No. 5 protrudes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat sink 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825. A first gear 843 (driving gear) is fixed to the main body. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and is formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. A shaft 845, the other end of which is supported in the shaft hole 846, is rotatably provided. Above the second gear 844, a third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is a unit sub-plate. A shaft 848 press-fitted in a shaft hole 849 formed in 825 is rotatably provided. Furthermore, the third gear 847
Above the detection disk 8 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) meshing with the third gear 847.
50 is rotatably provided on a rotating shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807. As shown in FIG. 55, the tip of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. The rotating shaft 808 is supported by being pressed into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801 and supported at the other end by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and the detection disk 850 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866.
Is pivotally supported. However, as shown in FIG. 55, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated around the rotation shaft 808. It is designed to rotate. Therefore, when the payout motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is caused by the first gear 843 and the second gear 8.
44, the third gear 847, and the gear 852 of the detection disk 850 are transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807.

The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the case of illustration). 3) detection notches 851 are formed. The detection notch 851 is detected by a light emitting / receiving sensor 855 (rotational position detecting means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. . The sensor 855 monitors whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the sensor 855 (mostly, the sprocket 807 is in a ball-engaged state), the sprocket 807
Is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate an abnormal state (for example, a ball biting state). Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 55, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side. As a result, the gear cover 866 that covers the gear region 840 is provided. A mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side and the first gear 843 and the third gear 8 provided on the unit sub plate 825 side are provided.
The base unit body 451 is held in a state where the unit sub-plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866 in a state where the mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned with each other. And the gear cover 866 are fixed integrally. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, there is a wiring processing piece 869 that hangs and collects wiring connected to the relay board 830 (for example, wiring connecting the relay board 830 and a payout control board 1186 described later). Projected.

The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub-plate 825, the relay board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, as shown in FIG. A bent passage 803 through which a ball to be taken out is guided
The cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is stored in the lower position. Also,
The unit base body 801 includes a ball passage (a bent passage 803, a prize ball passage 810, a ball passage 81).
1) provided with a sprocket 807 disposed inside, and a payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed in a depth width dimension of the ball path at a position avoiding the ball path,
The unit sub-plate 825 includes a motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side.
Rotation transmission member (first gear 843,
2 and 3 gears 844 and 847 and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850, and a unit sub-plate including a discharge motor 815 and a sprocket 807 as a discharge member disposed in the distribution space 805 of the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 847, and 850 (852) provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of 825 are coupled to be rotationally driven. That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. Moreover, the sprocket 807 and the dispensing motor 81
5 (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844, 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) are provided along a predetermined width on the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be reduced in thickness as compared with the case where a part of the payout motor and the sprocket is arranged outside the ball passage. Also, such a prize ball unit 800 is
Ball passages in the prize ball unit 800 (bent passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811)
) Is formed in a single passage shape, further reducing the thickness. That is,
Unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, the prize ball is attached to the rear side wall 546 of the main frame 3 when it is attached to the rear side. Any part of the unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. In FIG. 55, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is the unit base body 80.
25, the projecting portion is a front portion of the main body frame 3 from the payout motor escape opening 572 below the shaft support side rear wall 546, as shown in FIG. As a result, only the dimension obtained by subtracting the plate thickness dimension of the pivot support side rear wall 546 from the projection dimension is projected, and the projection amount toward the front side from the pivot support side rear wall 546 is as follows. It is a little. Further, by taking such a configuration, in this embodiment,
A storage space for storing a rearward projecting portion of the gaming device provided on the game board 4 between the rear wall 546 on the pivot support side of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the rear surface of the game board 4 in the depth width direction. It can be taken big.

In addition, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 47, the hook-shaped engagement portion 824, the engagement protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573, and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed down while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. In order to prevent this, each of the above engagement states is easily released by moving the prize ball unit 800 upward.
64 is adapted to engage with the button insertion engagement hole 821. That is, the elastic claw 5 for locking
64 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged with each other so that the prize ball unit 800 is attached in the attached state.
Is prevented from moving upward. In this way, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the prize ball unit 80
The upstream end of the zero bent passage 803 can be communicated with a passage formed by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the prize ball passage 81 is provided.
The downstream end of 0 is connected to a prize ball inlet 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal passage 811 is connected to the upstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880.

On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released and the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed, and the prize ball unit 800. Engagement of the lower end portion of the groove and the locking groove 573 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824
By releasing the engagement with the engaging protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the near side, the prize ball unit 800 can be easily removed.

<Full tank unit>
The full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 62. 56 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900. FIG. 58 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 59 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 60 is a full tank unit 900.
FIG. 61 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the foul port and the foul port 610.
FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom rocking plate 907 provided at 00, and FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full unit 900 and the foul port 610.

The full unit 900 is placed and fixed on the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3 as described above. As shown in FIG. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed in from a prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

Further, the ball that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed forward and the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920 of the plate unit 300 described above. Guided to prize ball contact 451.

By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905 so as to open over the entire bottom surface. ing. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is semi-circularly supported by being fitted to the shaft support protrusion 911 when viewed from the front on the downstream side of the back surface. A bearing portion 908 is formed to project. Also, the bottom rocking plate 90
As shown in FIG. 61, the center of the rear surface of the spring 7 has a spring locking projection 9 on which the upper end of the spring 913 is locked.
10 protrudes downward. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. And spring 9
No. 13, even when the number of normal prize balls to be paid out (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom surface rocking plate 907 at a time, the bottom surface rocking plate 907 does not rock downward, and is more than the number of prize balls to be paid out. The predetermined number of balls are formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. This detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is pivotally supported by the shaft projection 911, and the switch housing space 9 to be described next.
14 is located.

In addition, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed on the outer side of the upstream end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 905. Switch storage space 91
4, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 in the upper portion of the switch storage space 914 and attached to the switch mounting portion 918. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 60, the foul ball passage 922 is bent and formed such that the foul ball entrance 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. For this reason, the foul ball taken into the foul port 610 is guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 451 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

Further, the box main body 901 includes both sides of the outlet 921 and the foul ball inlet 923.
An engagement piece 924 that is engaged with a unit engagement groove 532 formed on the full unit mounting portion 531 is protruded on one side of the unit, and a latch piece 928 formed on the lid body 926. A latching protrusion 925 that engages is formed. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

On the other hand, the lid 926 includes a side guide passage 902 and a reverse side guide passage 90 of the box main body 901.
5, formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the front guide passage 920 and the foul ball passage 922, and a square prize ball inlet 927 is opened in the side guide passage 902 at a position corresponding to the upstream end. . Further, a latching piece 928 for engaging with the latching protrusion 925 of the box main body 901 is provided around the lid 926 so as to project downward.

In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 56, the balls paid out from the prize ball path 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are passed from the prize ball entrance 927 to the side guide path 9.
02 enters the upstream side of 02 and is guided sideways by the side guide receiving portion 903 to be cushioned 9
Collide with 04. The sphere colliding with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 toward the downstream side as it is, so that the front guide passage 92 is directed.
Then, it is led to the dish unit 300 from the outlet 921 of the front guide passage 920 through the prize ball connecting rod 451. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joined to the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball contact hole 451 from the outlet 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. Since the elastic force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of normal prize balls is paid out, the bottom rocking plate 907
As shown by the solid line in FIG. 61, the detection protrusion 909 enters between the light projector and the light receiver of the full light switch 916 of the light projecting / receiving method and the switch is not conductive (OFF).
It has become. On the other hand, prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full unit 900
When the sphere is also filled in, the bottom rocking plate 907 is caused by the pressure of the ball stored on the bottom rocking plate 907 formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide passage 920 and the reverse side guide passage 905.
Oscillates downward against the biasing force of the spring 913, and as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 61, the detection protrusion 909 is disengaged from between the light projector and the light receiver of the full switch 916 of the light projecting / receiving method. The switch is in a conductive state (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned ON, the prize ball unit 80
The rotation driving of the payout motor 815 of 0 stops (when the ON signal is derived while paying out a predetermined number of prize balls, it stops after the predetermined number of prize balls are paid out). ing.

As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having a width substantially the same as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the ball flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). The biasing member (spring 913) is operated so that the bottom rocking plate 907 is swung when a certain amount of the ball is placed without being swung by the normal flow of the ball.
As a result, the ball is placed in a part of the passage part due to the clogging. The situation where it is not detected can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

As described above, the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment is detachably attached to the full tank unit placement portion 531 of the main body frame 3, so that the full tank device is attached to the main body frame as in the past. It is not necessary to form a passage for a full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the formed dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Furthermore, the full unit 900 according to the present embodiment.
Since the foul ball passage 922 for guiding the foul ball is designed to join the ball by reducing the momentum of the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 920 for delivering the prize ball, the foul ball can be Can be merged.

<Lock device>
Next, the lock device 1000 attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 on the open side.
Will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 71. FIG. 63 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the lock device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 64 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing a latching structure of the lock device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 66 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 66 shows the lock device 1000 and the main body frame 3.
FIG. 67 is an enlarged sectional view showing a detailed relationship with the side walls 540 and 541 of FIG.
FIG. 68 is a side view (A) of FIG. 0, a perspective view (B) seen from the front side, and FIG. 68 is a perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device 1000, and the U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and FIG. 69 is a perspective view of a door frame sliding bar 1040 and a body frame sliding bar 1050 provided inside the door frame slidably. FIG. 70 is a front view for explaining the operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and FIG.
It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of 023,1032.

The locking device 1000 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality (in the middle and near the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 540 (
In the case of illustration, three lock locking holes 548, the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540, the lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut in the middle, and the upper part of the cylinder lock through hole 526 The U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 described below is supported and fixed by the formed lock mounting hole 547. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, the locking device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. Sliding rod 1040 for main frame and sliding rod 10 for body frame provided slidably in the U-shaped base body 1001
50 and fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the U-shaped base body 1001 so that the sliding movement of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be performed illegally.

The U-shaped base body 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is greatly increased, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased. The mounting structure that allows the locking device 1000 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width dimension of the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment because the size between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 have hook portions 1041, 1054, 1 respectively.
Except for 065, the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered with a fraud prevention structure.

First, a rectangular hook penetration opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 pass is opened on the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 and on the closed side. Further, a screw fixing portion 1003 protrudes in the horizontal direction at the upper part and the middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 69) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, and further, the side surface 1001a (not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side) 69) and both open side surfaces 100.
A locking projection 1004 is formed to project from the lower end of 1a and 1001b. Screw fixing part 100
3 and the locking projection 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The locking projection 1004 is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward (FIG. 64).
In this state, since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. it can. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 to a corresponding position with a screw (not shown).

In addition, when mounting, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 for positioning and locking, and the U-shaped Screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two positions on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are formed in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. And since the lower part of the locking device 1000 is fixed with the screw fixing part 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547,
The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure. In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is fixed to the main body by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to the frame 3. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear part are the U-shaped base body 1001.
This is a structure that is projected and formed in a horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, compared to the case where the front locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose.

Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in the stored state. it can. That is, one rivet slot 1042 is formed in each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are respectively formed in the main frame sliding rod 1050. Rivet slot 1055,1061
By allowing the rivet 1006 to pass through, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can move upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can move downward. Therefore,
As shown in FIG. 68 (B), long holes 1055 and 1061 for rivets in the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.
A rivet 1006 passes through the lower end of the door, and as shown in FIG.
A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the 040 rivet slot 1042.

Further, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001, and at the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock attaching piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 protrudes laterally, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 are provided on the side face 1001 b in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. Fraud prevention notch 10
In 07, a stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 described later is advanced and retracted. This point will be described in detail later. Further, the front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 is arranged so that the lock attachment piece 1008 is positioned lower than the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 with the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock attachment piece 1008 is provided with a lock insertion hole 1 through which the cylinder lock 1010 passes.
009 is formed, and mounting holes 1014 for mounting the mounting holes 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 with screws 1012 are formed in two upper and lower positions,
Furthermore, a screw stopper 1003 for attaching the lower part of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 is formed. Further, the insertion vertical opening 1020 has a first locking projection 1017 and a second locking projection 1018 of the locking cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010.
The spring locking piece 1021 is a tamper-proof member 1023.
A spring 1035 provided at 1032 is locked, and the relief side hole 1022 constitutes a relief hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. This point will be described in detail later.

The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock body fixed to the front of the lock attachment substrate 1011, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is the lock attachment substrate. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019.
The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement projection piece 1017 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The second engagement protrusion 101 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when the side rotates.
It is eight. The cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above has an attachment hole 1013 and a lock attachment piece 1008 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011 by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into the lock insertion hole 1009. The mounting hole 1014 is aligned with the screw 101
2, the cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001.

Next, fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The anti-fraud members 1023 and 1032 are the cylinder lock 101
For example, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is prevented from being lowered illegally by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating 0 with an official key. Accordingly, the anti-fraud members 1023 and 103
2 has a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 to the lowermost insertion hole 100.
5 and rivets 1006.

The first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engaging protruding piece 101 is formed in the protruding piece insertion hole 1026.
8 can be inserted. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the upward engagement hole 1045 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is engaged. In addition, an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is an inclined portion 1024. The inclined portion 1024 contacts the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are rotated when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. The first fraud prevention member 1023
Oscillates around the oscillating shaft hole 1025 (clockwise direction in FIG. 71B).

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding on an outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and the restricting protruding piece 1 below the stopper piece 1027.
031 is protruded, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are formed vertically on the front portion of the restricting protrusion 1031. The stopper piece 1027 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is engaged. This is to prevent unauthorized sliding. Further, the restricting protruding piece 1031 has a first anti-tampering member 1023 and a second anti-tampering member 1032 which are springs 1035.
Are connected by the spring 1035, but the second fraud prevention member 1032
The movement in the urging direction is restricted. The pin hole 1029 is for fixing the guide pin 1028. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the U-shaped body. Further, the connecting hole 103
0 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with the connecting pin 1034.

The second tamper-proof member 1032 connected to the first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed of a reverse “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed at an upper end, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 1036 is formed, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. Connecting hole 10
33 is for connecting with the connecting pin 1034 so as to coincide with the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and one end of the spring locking hole 1036 is connected to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base body 1001. The other end of the spring 1035 to be locked is locked. Further, the contact portion 103
7 abuts on a closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed forward and downward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 is formed of a U-shaped base 10.
The door hook hole 549 formed in the main body frame 3 when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 (FIG. 21). And a hook cover 227 (see FIG. 1) that protrudes forward from the door frame 5 and is formed on the back surface of the door frame 5.
5)). Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 104 is raised by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040.
1 and the hook cover 227 can be unlocked.

In addition, a vertically long rivet hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the uppermost rivet for the rivet long hole 1042 is formed. The guide projection 104 is formed below the elongated hole 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040
3 is projected. The rivet long hole 1042 is formed through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001.
A rivet 1006 inserted through the rivet is penetrated, and this rivet 1006
Is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to disturb the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. And
In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end of the rivet slot 1042. The guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. And the sliding motion 1050 for the main body frame are guided.

Also, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046.
The other end of 048 is locked to a spring hook portion 1057 formed on the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040, a contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape. This abutting elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be used inside the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 1040 from rattling. Further, the side of the lower part of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame are both vertically long play holes 1.
044 and the rising engagement hole 1045 are formed. The play hole 1044 has an engagement cam 1016.
When the first engagement projection piece 1017 is inserted and rotated, a space is formed in which the tip of the first engagement projection piece 1017 can move so as not to interfere with the rotation operation. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 1045 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. It should be noted that the fraud prevention cutout portion 100 is provided at the lower rear of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040.
An escape notch 1049 that is a notch larger than 7 in the vertical direction is formed. The escape notch 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 so as to be surely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066.

On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

By the way, the upper hook member 1051 has a hook portion 1054 at the upper end portion thereof toward the rear.
And a rivet slot 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion,
Further, a spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the front vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 38 provided on the inner side on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed.
The rivet slot 1055 is a rivet slot 1 formed in the upper portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040.
In the normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet long hole 1055, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the protruding piece moving hole 1056 has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame.
The upper guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 10.
50 to guide the mutual movement. The spring hook portion 1057 is for locking the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. The connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, the contact portion 105
No. 9 is for contacting the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001 so that the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051 can be performed smoothly without backlash. Is.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 projecting rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and a long rivet hole 1061 and a downward engagement hole 106 extending from the upper side to the lower side of the plate surface portion.
2, a play hole 1063, and a projecting piece moving hole 1064 are sequentially formed, a connection hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the vertical side at the front, and an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the vertical side at the rear.
Further, contact portions 1067 are formed on the upper side and the lower side. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing protrusion 41 provided on the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1061 is a rivet slot 104 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040.
In the normal state where the rivet 1006 is passed through the rivet long hole 1061, the rivet 1006 passes through the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. The descending engagement hole 1062 is provided with the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016.
When the is inserted and pivoted, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is engaged so as to be lowered by the pivoting operation. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 that does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. Projection piece moving hole 10
64, as described above, the guide protrusion 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted to guide the mutual movement of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050. It has become. Further, the connecting hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1067 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1067 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 is smooth and smooth. It is for making.

As mentioned above, although each member which comprises the locking device 1000 has been described, the locking device 1000
To assemble the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 10 of the body frame sliding rod 1050.
52 with a connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion 10 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame.
43 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long holes 1042 and the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. The hook portion 10 of the upper hook member 1051 in the state
54 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are U-shaped. Insert into the space. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 from the insertion hole 1005
Plug in. At this time, the rivet 1006 is a rivet slot 1055, 1061, 1042.
Insert so that it passes through. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connection pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 is inserted into the longitudinal opening 1
It is necessary to insert it into the opening at the lowest end of 020.

The rivet 1006 allows the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 to be U-shaped.
The spring 1048 is attached to the spring hook portion 1046, 1 while being housed and fixed in 001.
057, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is hung on the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021, 1036. The second fraud prevention member 1032 is brought into contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is outside the inclined portion 1024 and the insertion vertical opening 1
Inserting slightly into 020, the tip of the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008.

In order to attach the lock device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3,
As described above, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is formed on the body frame 3 while the door frame hook portion 1041 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the door hook hole 549 formed on the body frame 3. The screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction are aligned with the lock mounting hole 547 in this state and inserted into the lock locking hole 548, and then a screw (not shown) is screwed into the corresponding hole. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 63, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, the side surface 100 in which the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001.
On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base 1001. Therefore, as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the lock device 1000 is prevented from being loose.
Can be fixed to the main body frame 3.

By the way, the operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In the state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The hooks 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked and the door frame sliding rod 10 is locked.
The door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 of the door frame 5 are locked. In this state, a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the engagement cam 1016 is inserted.
When the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the first member is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, FIG.
B), the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the lower hook member 1052 is moved downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 connected thereto are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, since the locking projections 38, 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are released, the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2. When closing the body frame 3,
The hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (FIG. 70).
(The same raised position as in the state shown in (A)), but because the upper sides of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are inclined downward toward the outside, the main body frame 3 is forcibly separated from the outer frame 2 By pressing, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 comes into contact with the lower end portions of the closing projections 38 and 41, so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and finally the hook portion 1054.
, 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hooked state of the hook cover 227 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened. When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook 1
041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 70A), but the lower side of the door frame hook portion 1041 is inclined upward. Therefore, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 comes into contact with the upper end portion of the hook cover 227. Ascending upward, finally, the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 are locked again, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is lowered to return to the locked state.
The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the side surface in the vertical direction of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and that is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction, and an illegal act of forcibly opening the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from there There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

As described above, the lock device 1000 according to this embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, the hook portion 1 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010.
An illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on 054, 1065 and lowering the piano wire may be performed, but in this embodiment, such an illegal act cannot be performed. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are It is in a contact state. In this state, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is tamper-proof notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. Piece 1
017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. The first engagement protrusion 1017
Since the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 are in contact with each other during the rotation of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the first fraud prevention member 1023 rotates clockwise around the swing shaft hole 1025. The stopper piece 1027 also starts to rotate in the direction and moves so as to retract from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. For this reason, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the locking state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, and thus the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing protrusion 41 of the outer frame 2 and the second fraud prevention member 103 are closed.
The two abutting portions 1037 abut from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. For this reason, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

Even in the lock mechanism that is the first tamper-proof structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first tamper-proof member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame provided inside is used. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, they are completely covered. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 close the closed space Since the intrusion is prevented, fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

As described above in detail, the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment has a lateral width dimension of the conventional L
The sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the body frame are slidably provided in the inside of the U-shaped substrate 1001 which is extremely thin compared to the locking device concentrated on the character-shaped substrate, and the locking device 1000 is operated. Since the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 is a position below the lower end side of the game board, the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely increased, Even if the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is enlarged, the lock device 10
00 can be firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. And since it is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside and the main body Frame sliding rod 1050
Are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. Therefore, a body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. It is not possible to easily perform fraudulent activities such as lowering Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws, the locking device 1000 The front portion of the lock device is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. However, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock attachment piece 1008. The structure may be such that the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screwing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like.
An L-shaped base body (tablet base body) in which the side surface 1001b closely contacting the surface is omitted, and a sliding frame for a door frame is formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base body (tablet base body) and the first side wall 540. It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1040 and the sliding rod 1050 for main body frames. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

<Board unit>
Next, the board unit 1100 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as viewed from the back side, and FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as viewed from the front side.

The substrate unit 1100 includes a plurality of holder mounting holes 5 formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3.
27 (see FIG. 22 and FIG. 24), as shown in the figure, a synthetic resin molded frame substrate holder 1101 includes a door relay substrate, a power supply substrate box 1103, a terminal substrate box 1104, and a payout control substrate. The box 1105, the main drawer relay board, and the sub drawer relay board are attached to each other. Among the above boards, the door relay board, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the dispensing control board box 1
105 is attached to the rear side of the frame substrate holder 1101 overlapping in the front-rear direction, and the main drawer relay board and the sub drawer relay board are attached to the front side of the frame board holder 1101. A shield plate is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from a power supply board or the like, and the main drawer relay board and the sub drawer relay board are covered with a board cover 1109. Attached.

First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a horizontally long synthetic resin, and as shown in the figure, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side, and although not shown, the wiring opening 1124 is omitted.
A recess for a relay board for attaching the door relay board is formed on the inside. At both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 are projected outward, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment hole portions of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to 527 (see FIG. 22). Note that the mounting hole portion 527 is shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 4, it has an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the mounting piece 1122.
Further, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 73) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

Further, an out-sphere passage 1119 is formed in an inverted L shape substantially at the center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. The out-ball passage 1119 has the above-described out-port 606 (FIG. 3).
1), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 22), and the upper side is formed so as to correspond to the drop port 629 (see FIG. 29), and the downstream side is wide so that the balls are discharged in a row. It is narrowly formed. Therefore, when the substrate unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606, as shown in FIG. ing. And out ball passage 111
Out balls, winning balls, or ball-out balls are discharged from the downstream end of 9 toward the outside of the pachinko machine (generally, the island recovery basket).

The board cover 1109 has a main drawer relay connector 120 provided on the main drawer relay board.
0 and a dispensing control board connector 1201, a sub drawer relay connector 1202 provided on the sub drawer relay board, and a door frame connector 1203 have a rectangular connector opening for projecting to the outside of the board cover 1109. Yes.

The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body to which a horizontally long rectangular payout control board is fixed, and a cover body that is attached to the box main body and covers the surface of the payout control board. The box main body and the cover body are engaged with each other on one side, and are fixed to the other side by caulking with a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body and the cover body, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, caulking and fixing in the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the illustrated case, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act.

<Cover body>
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6, 24, and 28. The cover body 1250 covers the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted from above into a cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is formed at substantially the center of the other side. The cover body 12
By inserting 50 shaft support pins 1251 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 12
50 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engagement piece 1252 is engaged with the cover body engagement groove 785, whereby the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the game board 4 can protect the back surfaces of the various components. In the case of opening, the engagement piece 12
The engagement between the cover 52 and the cover body engaging groove 785 may be released.

Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, a locking hole 1253 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and the locking protruding bar 5 5 protruding from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3.
A through hole 1254 that penetrates through 70 is formed, and although not shown in detail, in the same manner as the cover body 1270 according to the second embodiment to be described next, a connection operation opening 1255, a standing wall, a contact protrusion, and a reinforcing rib Is formed. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are the connection operation opening 1283 and the standing wall 128 of the cover body 1270 according to the second embodiment.
4. It is provided at the same position as the contact protrusion 1285 and the reinforcing rib 1286 and performs the same function. Thus, with the cover body 1250 closed, the retaining hole 125 of the cover body 1250 is closed.
3 and the fixing hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are made to coincide with each other and fixed with a screw (not shown), so that the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. Then, the locking protruding flange 570 is attached to the cover body 1 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3.
Since the through-hole 1254 of 250 is penetrated, for example, a lock such as a padlock can be used as a locking protrusion 5 for locking.
By hooking to 70, only the person having the padlock key can open the cover body 1250.

[Game device and effect device]
Next, a gaming device and a rendering device arranged on the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 is a front view of the game board 4 having the game area 605, and FIG.
FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the game board 4 having the game area 605 as viewed from the upper right front, FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the game board 4 having the game area 605 as viewed from the upper left of the front, and FIG. 77 is a view of the game area 605. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board 4 which has, and was seen from diagonally forward.

The gaming panel 599 forming the gaming area 605 has an opening 1400 (FIG. 77) at the center.
And a frame-shaped center accessory 140 so as to surround the opening 1400.
1 is attached. That is, a game area 605 is defined on the surface of the game panel 599 by the center combination 1401, and a number of obstacle nails (not shown) are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the game area 605. In addition, a entrance unit 1402 into which a game ball rolling in the game area 605 can enter is disposed. Although details will be described later, an open / close prize device 1404 and a passing gate 1405 are formed on the outer peripheral surface (particularly, the right side edge) of the center accessory 1401 facing the game area 605.

A specific configuration of the center accessory 1401 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 (a)
FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the center accessory 1401 viewed from the front upper right, and FIG. 78B is a perspective view of the center accessory 1401 viewed from the upper left front. The center accessory 1401 is formed of a mirror-finished member, and a warp inlet 1408 that opens to the outside of the center accessory 1401 and an opening to the inside of the center accessory 1401 are formed at the left side edge of the center accessory 1401. Warp outlet 1409, and a warp passage that communicates the warp inlet 1408 and the warp outlet 1409 (
(Not shown) is formed.

Further, a sub-stage 1407 is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge portion of the center accessory 1401. The sub-stage 1407 is capable of rolling a game ball that deviates from a stage 1443 described later in the left-right direction. In the central portion of the substage 1407, an outflow portion 1407a having a forward descending slope for allowing the game ball, which has become weaker to flow out, to the front is formed. A communicating outflow passage 1416 is formed in the front-rear direction. In addition, front wall portions 1415 are formed on the left and right side portions of the front edge of the substage 1407 to prevent the game ball from deviating from the front wall portions 1415. That is, stage 1443
It is configured to receive the game ball discharged from and roll in the left-right direction.

In addition, a plurality of colorful decorative portions 1412 are formed on the front surface of the center accessory 1401 to enhance the design of the center accessory 1401. In addition, a plurality of light emitting portions 1413 are embedded in the decoration portion 1412 so that light is emitted based on the gaming state.

The open / close winning device 1404 is arranged at the lower right side edge of the center bonus 1401 and wins a big prize opening (not shown: winning prize opening) opened to the outside of the center bonus 1401 and a big prize winning opening. A big prize opening sensor 2370 (see FIG. 92: winning detection means) for detecting the played game ball,
It has a streamline shape that extends in the vertical direction that can close the big prize opening, is pivotally supported on the lower side and can be rotated clockwise from an upright state, and a plunger that can be moved back and forth in the vertical direction. There are provided an attacker solenoid 1429 and a transmission member (not shown) which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction as the plunger of the attacker solenoid 1429 advances and retreats to rotate the movable piece 1430. Note that the game ball that enters from the big prize opening and is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2370 is discharged as it is below the opening / closing prize winning device 1404, but one of the game balls is a stop that will be described later. The vehicle is stopped by means 1515.

The passage gate 1405 includes a gate inlet 1432 and a gate outlet 1433 that are open to the outside of the center accessory 1401, a gate passage (not shown) that communicates these, and a gate sensor 2990 that detects a game ball that passes through the gate passage (see FIG. 92).

A specific configuration of the entrance unit 1402 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 79. FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the entrance unit 1402 as seen from the front upper right. The entrance unit 1402 includes a plurality of general winning ports 1419 (winning ports) through which game balls can enter, and a first start port 1420 (winning port) disposed below the outlet 1416 of the center bonus 1401. And a second start port 1421 (winning port) disposed on the right side of the first start port 1420. More specifically, the general winning opening 1419 is divided into a right side, a central side, and a left side of the game area 605, and a first start is made between the general winning opening 1419 on the left side and the general winning opening 1419 on the central side. A mouth 1420 is arranged, a general winning opening 1419 on the center side and a general winning opening 141 on the right side.
9, a second start port 1421 is disposed between them. Note that the arrangement position with respect to the center accessory 1401 is such that the first start port 1420 is slightly to the left of directly below the center accessory 1401 and the second start port 1421 is to the lower right of the center accessory 1401. That is, the first start port 1
420 is arranged on the left side of the center of the game area 605, and the second start port 1421, the aforementioned open / close prize apparatus 1404 and the passing gate 1405 are arranged on the right side of the game area 605.

The first starting port 1420 is a pocket type winning port device that allows a game ball to be always won, and includes a first starting port sensor 2416 (see FIG. 92: winning detection means) that detects the winning game ball.

On the other hand, the second start port 1421 is configured to be openable and closable by a pair of movable pieces 1427. That is, the second start port 1421 further includes a start port opening / closing drive unit (not shown) that drives the pair of movable pieces 1427 to open and close, and this start port opening / closing drive unit has a plunger that can be moved forward and backward. Start port solenoid 2352 and start port solenoid 23
As the plunger moves forward and backward in 52, the transmission member rotates around a shaft extending in the horizontal direction and the left-right direction, and can move the protruding pins extending from the pair of movable pieces 1427 to the rear side in the vertical direction. (Not shown). A second start port sensor 2358 (see FIG. 92: winning detection means) is provided below the start port solenoid 2352, and the second start port 1
The game ball won in 421 passes through the through hole of the second starter sensor 2358 and is detected by the second starter sensor 2358. The movable piece 1427 is opened for a predetermined time when it is detected that a game ball has passed through the passing gate 1405, and a normal lottery is performed based on the detected result. That is, the second start port 1421
Will be released only when the normal lottery is won, and game balls can be won.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, the ball hitting device 6 corresponds to the operation of the operation handle portion 461.
When a game ball is fired from 50, the game ball is guided to the upper left part of the game area 605 by the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 604, and is released into the game area 605 from this part. Since the first start port 1420 is arranged at a position slightly to the left of the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 605, as a normal gaming method, many game balls are placed in the first start port 1420. It is preferable to launch a game ball aiming at the left side of the center actor 1401 so as to win a prize. This is because the second starting port 1421 and the passing gate 1405 are arranged on the right side or lower right side of the center combination 1401 in the game area 605, but the second starting port 1421 is opened as long as it is not hit in the normal lottery. Even if the game ball can be passed through the passing gate 1405 that triggers the normal lottery, the probability that the second start port 1421 is difficult to open in normal times, that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery Is set to be extremely low. That is, even if the game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the center accessory 1401 (so-called “right hit”), it is not possible to expect a big hit.

On the other hand, when a big hit lottery is performed based on the winning of a game ball to the first start port 1420 and the lottery result is a specific result, a specific profit is given. Specifically, the opening / closing operation of the open / close winning device 1404 is repeated a plurality of times, and the opening time per time in the open state is set to a time that allows a plurality of game balls to win with a margin. Here, since the open / close winning device 1404 is arranged on the right side of the center role 1401 in the game area 605, it is preferable to make a right strike so that the open / close winning device 1404 can win a lot of game balls. In addition, after the specific profit is given, the probability of the normal start lottery wins and the second start port 1421 is opened increases. That is, it is possible to easily win a game ball with respect to the second start port 1421. For this reason, it is preferable that the player continues to make a right turn so as to win a lot of game balls in the passing gate 1405 and the second start port 1421.

As described above, it is preferable to operate the operation handle portion 461 to change the way of hitting the game ball between the normal time and the specific game state, and the original interest of the pachinko machine can be improved. In addition, since the game is performed in different regions and under different conditions in the normal time and in the specific game state, the monotony of the game content can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 74, between the first start port 1420 and the second start port 1421, a game region 60 above the second start port 1421 to a game region 60 above the first start port 1420.
An obstacle nail 1426 is provided to prevent the flow of the game ball to 5. Therefore, for example, when a game ball is hit to the right, a game ball that has not won a prize at the second start port 1421 becomes a first start port 14.
Therefore, it is possible to clearly distinguish the game area 605 used in normal times from the game area 605 used in a specific game state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79, a passage blocking member 1424 for preventing the game ball from rolling through the region below the second starting port 1421 extends below the second starting port 1421. Further, on the left side of the passage blocking member 1424, there is a center accessory 1401.
The right out port 1425 that allows the game ball flowing down through the right side of the game to be discharged from the game area 605
Is provided. For this reason, the game ball flowing down through the left side of the center role 1401
Discharged from an out port 606 (see FIG. 74) disposed on the left side of the passage blocking member 1424;
On the other hand, the game ball flowing down through the right side of the center accessory 1401 is discharged from the right-out port 1425. In other words, the game balls that have flowed down without winning the respective start ports 1420 and 1421 and the open / close winning device 1404 are discharged from the game area 605, but game balls that have been driven into the left and right sides of the center accessory 1401. Are discharged from separate out ports 606 and 1425 without joining to the end. For this reason, it can be made to feel as if the area on the right side and the area on the left side of the center combination 1401 are partitioned, and it is possible to easily recognize that it is necessary to switch how to hit the game ball.

Further, a special symbol display 1428 for displaying a special symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the big hit lottery is attached to the passage preventing member 1424. For this reason, the lottery result for the second start port 1421 can be easily recognized, and attention to the second start port 1421 can be further attracted.

<Frame decoration unit>
Next, the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440 arranged inside the winning space forming cover body 621 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a front view of the winning space forming cover body 621 having the frame-shaped decorative unit 1440, and FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the winning space forming cover body 621 having the frame-shaped decorative unit 1440 as viewed from the front upper right. 82 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the stage 1443 and the distribution effect device 1444 provided in the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440. FIG.

As described above, the winning space forming cover body 621 is attached to the back side of the game panel 599 (see FIG. 77). Then, a frame-shaped decorative unit 1440 configured in a frame shape is accommodated inside the winning space forming cover body 621, and from the player side through the opening 1401a of the center accessory 1401, as shown in FIG. It is possible to make it visible. That is, as shown in FIG. 77, the size of the opening 1440 in the frame-shaped decorative unit 1440 is smaller than the opening 1401a of the center accessory 1401, and the inner peripheral surface of the frame-shaped decorative unit 1440 is the center role. The object 1401 extends from the inner peripheral surface toward the center. The frame-shaped decorative unit 1440 is provided with a decorative portion 1441 integrally formed over the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface of the inner peripheral surface, and an electric decoration portion 1442 arranged on the decorative portion 1441 and capable of emitting light. ing. In addition, the electrical decoration part 1442 is "L", "O", "V".
, “E” individually and four light emitting cases each having a front transparent lid, and light emitting substrates 2892a to 2892c that are accommodated in the light emitting cases and emit light toward the transparent lid (see FIG. 93). ), And between the light emitting substrates 2892a to 2892c and the transparent lid, the light emitting substrate 2
It is comprised from the reflection member (not shown) which diffusely reflects the light radiated | emitted from 892a-2892c.

Further, the bottom surface portion (that is, the upper surface of the lower edge portion) on the inner peripheral surface of the frame-shaped decorative unit 1440 is formed so as to extend rearward from the substage 1407 of the center accessory 1401, and is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge portion. 82, as shown in FIG. 82, the stage 1443 and the distribution effect device 144
4 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and further, a guide passage member 1445 for sending game balls to the sorting effect device 1444 is arranged.

<Stage structure>
First, the stage 1443 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 is a perspective view of the stage 1443 as viewed from the front upper right, FIG. 84 is a plan view of the stage 1443, FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. FIG. 87 is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 84, FIG. 88 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG.
89 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG. 84.

The stage 1443 is arranged on the left side of the upper surface of the lower edge of the frame-shaped decorative unit 1440, and passes through the warp passage formed in the center accessory 1401.
A rolling surface is provided for rolling a game ball that has entered in 0 in the left-right direction or the diagonal left-right direction.
In particular, the stage 1443 has n (five in this example) rolling surfaces arranged in a stepwise manner in the front-rear direction so that the rear stage side is higher than the front stage side, and the frame passes through the warp passage. The game balls that have entered the decorative unit 1440 are moved from the uppermost first rolling surface 1450 to the lowermost fifth rolling surface 1.
It is possible to flow down while rolling in order toward 454. That is, the game ball that enters the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440 is first sent to the uppermost first rolling surface 1450 and rolls on the first rolling surface 1450 in the left-right direction or the diagonal left-right direction. Thereafter, the game balls flow down while rolling in order toward the fifth rolling surface 1454 at the lowest stage, such as the second rolling surface 1451 at the second stage, and the third rolling surface 1452 at the third stage. To do. In addition, the game ball that has rolled up to the fifth rolling surface 1454 at the lowermost stage is flowed out of the stage 1443 and becomes a center accessory 1401.
It flows down toward the first start port 1420 arranged below the head. As described above, by providing a plurality of rolling surfaces formed in a staircase shape, the behavior of the game ball on the stage 1443 can be varied, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, each of the rolling surfaces 1450 to 1454 is set such that the length in the left-right direction becomes shorter as the lower rolling surface. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the behavior of the game ball on each rolling surface from becoming unnecessarily long. In addition, since each of the rolling surfaces 1450 to 1454 is gradually shortened, it is possible to gradually converge the rolling range of the game ball and feel that it is approaching a predetermined target arrival position (that is, the first start port 1420). It becomes possible to make it. Further, the rolling surfaces 1451 to 1454 other than the first rolling surface 1450 have the right end side at the center portion (the distribution effect device 144).
4 side). For this reason, it differs from a conventional gaming machine (that is, a gaming machine in which a stage is arranged directly above the first starting port 1420) for a player who pays attention to whether or not a winning is made at the first starting port 1420. The stage 1443 can be visually recognized by the line of sight. In other words, not only the configuration of the stage 1443 but also the arrangement of the stage 1443 is unique and can be characterized as a gaming machine concept.

As shown in FIGS. 83 and 85, the first rolling surface 1450 is a substantially arc-shaped first arc surface capable of reciprocating the game ball entering the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440 in the left-right direction. 14
60, and the first circular arc surface 1460 has a first forward-gradient slope in which a weakened game ball flows out toward the second rolling surface 1452 of the second stage at the central portion in the left-right direction. An outflow portion 1461 is formed. As shown in FIG. 84, the left end portion of the first arc surface 1460 extends forward, and the warp outlet 1409 of the center accessory 1401 and the first arc surface 1
A guide passage 1449 connecting 460 is formed integrally with the stage 1443. For this reason, through the warp passage and the guide passage 1449, the vigorous game ball is moved to the first rolling surface 1450.
It is possible to cause the game ball to roll on the first rolling surface 1450 for a relatively long time, and to easily recognize that the game ball has entered the stage 1443. It becomes possible. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball reaches the lower rolling surface without being noticed by the player and the game ball is discharged without delighting the behavior of the game ball.

As shown in FIGS. 83 and 86, the second rolling surface 1451 moves the game ball that has flowed out from the first outflow portion 1461 of the first rolling surface 1450 toward the left end side of the second rolling surface 1451. The second inclined surface 1462 to be rolled and the second outflow of the downward slope that causes the game ball rolled to the left end side by the second inclined surface 1462 to flow toward the third rolling surface 1452 at the third stage. Part 1463
And are formed. For this reason, the game ball sent to the second rolling surface 1451 is the first rolling surface 1.
The reciprocating motion as in 450 is not performed, but it rolls straight in the left direction and flows out as it is. Therefore, it is possible to cause a movement completely different from the behavior of the game ball on the first rolling surface 1450, and it is possible to further enhance the visual interest.

Further, the second rolling surface 1451 rolls a game ball that has flowed out of the first outflow portion 1461 of the first rolling surface 1450 and deviated from the upstream end side of the second inclined surface 1462 on the second inclined surface 1462. A second special path 1464 is further provided to allow the flow from the portion located on the opposite side of the second outflow portion 1463 to the third rolling surface 1452 without being moved. That is, the second rolling surface 145
1, the game ball sent from the first outflow portion 1461 of the first rolling surface 1450 can be deviated from the upstream end side of the second inclined surface 1462, and the game ball deviating from here is ,
By passing through the second special path 1464, the second inclined surface 1462 is bypassed, and the portion flows on the third rolling surface 1452 from the portion located on the opposite side of the second outflow portion 1463. Therefore, the game balls are distributed on the second rolling surface 1451, and the behavior of the game balls can be further paid attention.

As shown in FIGS. 83 and 87, the third rolling surface 1452 has a substantially arc shape that can reciprocate the game ball that has flowed out from the second outflow portion 1463 of the second rolling surface 1451 in the left-right direction. The third arcuate surface 1465 and the forward descending flow of the game ball, which is formed at the center portion of the third arcuate surface 1465 in the left-right direction and weakened, flows toward the fourth rolling surface 1453 of the fourth stage. A portion different from the third outflow portion 1466 without rolling the game ball that has flowed out through the second outflow portion 1466 of the gradient and the second special path 1464 of the second rolling surface 1451 on the third arc surface 1465. And a third special path 1467 for flowing out toward the fourth rolling surface 1453. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed out from the second outflow portion 1463 and sent to the third rolling surface 1452 is repeatedly rolled in the left-right direction by the substantially arc-shaped third arc surface 1465, and then the momentum is weakened. It flows out from the third outflow portion 1466 toward the fourth rolling surface 1453 of the fourth stage. Therefore, the game ball can be reciprocated again, and the change in the behavior of the game ball can be further varied. Further, the game ball that has flowed out through the second special path 1464 of the second rolling surface 1451 flows out from the second special path 1464 toward the fourth rolling surface 1453 without passing through the third arc surface 1465. Be made. That is, the second rolling surface 14
The game balls distributed to the second special route 1464 side in 51 are sent to the fourth rolling surface 1453 without joining the game balls passing through the normal route. For this reason, the advantage of a special passage can be maintained and a player can be given a sense of security.

The third rolling surface 1452 further includes a third discharge portion 1468 that is formed integrally with the third outflow portion 1466 and can discharge the game ball that has weakened momentum from the stage 1443. For this reason, since the game balls are distributed at the exit of the third rolling surface 1452, the whereabouts of the game balls can be focused to the end.

As shown in FIGS. 83 and 88, the fourth rolling surface 1453 includes a game ball that has flowed out from the third outflow portion 1466 of the third rolling surface 1452 and a third special path 1467 of the third rolling surface 1452. And the game balls that have flowed out through the four arc surfaces 1469 in a substantially arc shape capable of reciprocating these game balls in the left-right direction, and the left-right direction in the fourth arc surface 1469 A game ball formed in the central portion and weakened in momentum is moved to the fifth rolling surface 1454 of the fifth step.
A fourth outflow portion 1470 having a forward and downward slope that flows out toward the direction and a fourth discharge portion 1471 that is formed integrally with the fourth outflow portion 1470 and can discharge the game ball that has weakened momentum from the stage 1443. And. For this reason, it is possible to roll the game ball largely by the relatively large fourth arc surface 1469 without forming a special passage. Moreover, since what was once distributed in the 2nd rolling surface 1451 is merged in the 4th rolling surface 1453, expectation about the future whereabouts also about the game ball which was not distributed to the 2nd special path 1464 Can be generated.

By the way, in the case of simply joining the game balls once distributed, the second special route 146 is used.
The advantage of the game balls distributed to 4 is lost, and the distribution itself becomes meaningless. Therefore, in this example, the fourth outflow portion 1470 and the fourth discharge portion 1471 are configured such that the game ball that has flowed out through the third special path 1467 is more out of the game ball that has flowed out from the third outflow portion 1466. The arrangement position is set so that the probability of going to 1470 is high. That is, by changing the position at which the game ball is sent to the fourth arc surface 1469 from each other, the position where the game ball is discharged while using the common fourth arc surface 1469 is changed to the fourth outflow portion 1470 or the fourth discharge portion. 1471 is biased to either one. For this reason, the advantage of the game balls distributed to the second special route 1464 can be maintained, and the expectation can be maintained. In addition, since the game balls having different advantages roll in the left-right direction on the common fourth rolling surface 1453, it becomes possible to make the difference in a slight momentum.

As shown in FIGS. 83 and 89, the fifth rolling surface 1454 is the lowermost rolling surface, and the game ball that has flowed out from the fourth outflow portion 1470 of the fourth rolling surface 1453 is directed to the right. A fifth inclined surface 1472 to be rolled is provided, and an inflow port 1473 through which the game ball rolled to the right end portion of the fifth inclined surface 1472 is introduced. The inflow port 1473 communicates with a passage (not shown) formed in the upper surface of the lower edge portion of the frame-shaped decorative unit 1440, and an outflow passage formed in the lower end portion of the center accessory 1401 through the passage. 1461 is sent. That means
All the game balls that have reached the fifth rolling surface 1454 of the stage 1443 enter the inflow port 1473 and flow out to the game area 605 above the first start port 1420 through the outflow path 1461. That is, it is possible to win the first start port 1420 with a relatively high probability.

By the way, the substage 14 of the center accessory 1401 described above with reference to FIGS.
07 is arranged in front of the stage 1443 and is connected to the third discharge portion 1468 or the fourth discharge portion 14.
The game ball discharged from the stage 1443 through 71 is received, and the game ball is configured to roll in the left-right direction. For this reason, even when discharged from the third rolling surface 1452 or the fourth rolling surface 1453 to the outside of the stage 1443, the substage 14
It becomes possible to roll in the left-right direction by 07, and as a result, the behavior of the game ball can be fully enjoyed, and loss of expectation can be reduced. The sub-stage 1407 is determined based on the ease of winning a game ball with respect to the first start port 1420.
It is formed to be lower than 3. Therefore, the fifth rolling surface 14 of the stage 1443
54 and the middle rolling surface (third rolling surface 1452 and fourth rolling surface 1453)
It is possible to clearly differentiate the advantage from the case of being discharged from.

Further, the substage 1407 and the stage 1443 are formed of different materials. For this reason, different textures can be created, and it can be visually recognized that the functions and advantages are different from each other. In particular, the sub-stage 1407 is formed directly on the upper surface of the lower edge of the center accessory 1401, whereas the stage 1443 is a frame-shaped decorative unit 144.
0 is formed by a stage constituent member 1455 (see FIG. 83) placed on the upper surface of the lower edge portion. Therefore, it becomes possible to make only the stage 1443 stand out, and the stage 14
43 and the subordinate stage 1407 can be visually grasped. Further, it is necessary that the game balls discharged from the third rolling surface 1452 or the fourth rolling surface 1453 of the stage 1443 flow down toward the substage 1407. In this example, the stage 1
443 is formed by a stage constituent member 1455 different from the frame-shaped decorative unit 1440, so that the third rolling surface 1452 or the fourth rolling surface 1453 can be formed at a position higher than the substage 1407. Become.

The stage constituent member 1455 is made of a light-transmitting member, and a light emitting means 1456 for irradiating light from below toward the stage constituent member 1455 is disposed below the stage constituent member 1455 (FIG. 86 to 88). For this reason, it is possible to make the stage 1443 conspicuous and to create illusion due to light.

Further, the substage 1407 is formed to extend from the front of the stage 1443 to the front of the sorting effect device 1444. That is, while the stage 1443 and the distribution effect device 1444 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the lower edge of the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440, the sub-stage 1407 is not only the front of the stage 1443 but also the vibration. Minute production device 1444
It is formed to extend to the front. For this reason, the length of the substage 1407 in the left-right direction is considerably longer than that of the stage 1443, and the game ball can be greatly rolled in the left-right direction. Therefore, according to this sub-stage 1407, stage 144
It is possible to easily perform dynamic rolling in the left-right direction, which was difficult with 3, and a plurality of rolling surfaces 1450 to 1454 formed stepwise in the front-rear direction, and a stage 1443 extending in the left-right direction, By combining the above, a more varied behavior can be realized.

Further, the second rolling surface 1451 to the fifth rolling surface 1454 are the distribution effect device 14 in plan view.
44 is arranged to be tilted in the front-rear direction so that the end (right end) is located behind the opposite end (left end), and is configured to roll the game ball in the diagonal left-right direction. For this reason, even if the space in which the stage 1443 is disposed, in particular, the width in the left-right direction in the space is relatively narrow, the second rolling surface 1451 to the fifth rolling surface 1454 are tilted in the front-rear direction. This makes it possible to increase the length of the second rolling surface 1451 and the like. In addition, by rolling in the left-right direction, the game ball is displaced not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-rear direction, and the perspective of the game ball can be changed. Furthermore, since the right end portion on the distribution effect device 1444 side is arranged so as to be located behind the left end portion, the line of sight of the player who plays the game in front of the center of the game board 4, that is, the center front of the game board 4 Thus, it is possible to roll the game ball in a direction perpendicular to the line of sight of the player who sees the stage 1443 obliquely. Therefore, although the stage 1443 is provided only on the left side of the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440, it is possible to eliminate the sense that the stage 1443 is biased and to visually recognize the behavior of the game ball. . The first rolling surface 1450 is straightly formed in the left-right direction without being tilted in the front-rear direction. For this reason, the rolling direction of the game ball on the first rolling surface 1450 and the rolling direction of the game ball on the rolling surface after the second rolling surface 1451 are different from each other.
The behavior of the game ball can be further varied. Also, the first rolling surface 1450
Is formed at the farthest and uppermost stage, so that it is easy to arrange in the space above the distribution effect device 1444, that is, to the distribution effect device 1444 side.

<Configuration of distribution production device>
Next, the distribution effect device 1444 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 is a plan view showing the relationship between the distribution effect device 1444 and the guide passage member 1445, and FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the distribution effect device 1444 as viewed from the upper right.

As shown in FIG. 91, the distribution effect device 1444 is a base member 1 having a semicircular shape in plan view.
479, an inlet unit 1481 having a plurality of (three in this example) inlets 1480 assembled to the upper surface of the base member 1479 and capable of entering a game ball, and an inlet 1480 of the inlet unit 1481 A distribution unit 1482 for distributing game balls, and an inlet unit 14
81, a transparent cover 1483 covering 81, a light emitting substrate 1484 that is attached to the base member 1479 and emits light to the inlet unit 1481, and a lower case 1485 attached to the lower portion of the base member 1479. Has been.

The inlet 1480 in the inlet unit 1481 is a right inlet 1480a, a middle inlet 1
It consists of 480b and the left inflow port 1480c, and is arranged along the circular arc at a predetermined interval. The periphery of each inflow port 1480 is formed of a transparent member that can transmit light, and a mirror-finished member 1485 having three through holes drilled so as to partition each inflow port 1480 is laid on the upper surface thereof. ing.

In addition, a fan-shaped opening 1486 is provided at the center of the inlet unit 1481, and the guide member 1490 of the sorting unit 1482 is inserted into the opening 1486. Further, a lower stage illumination part 1488 and an upper stage illumination part 1487 are formed on the same arc as the arc where the three inflow ports 1480 are arranged, and is irradiated by the light emitting substrate 1484 assembled to the base member 1479. It is like that.

The sorting unit 1482 is opened only at the front end side toward the inflow port 1480 and guides the game ball sent to the rear end side toward any inflow port 1480.
A support member 1491 that supports the guide member 1490 so that the guide member 1490 can rotate (that is, turn in the horizontal direction) about the rear end side, and a distribution motor 149 that rotates the guide member 1490 within a predetermined range.
3 and a rotation mechanism 1494 that is coupled to the rotation shaft of the sorting motor 1493 and connected to the guide member 1490 via the rotation support shaft 1492 to reduce the number of rotations of the sorting motor 1493 and transmit it to the guide member 1490. It comprises. The deceleration mechanism 1494 includes
Reference position detection means 1495 is provided for detecting whether or not the guide member 1490 has reached a predetermined reference point.

The cover 1483 covers the entire inlet unit 1481 so that the game ball rolling in the game area 605 does not jump into the inlet unit 1481. An insertion notch 1498 for dropping a game ball is formed. In addition, a plurality of cylindrical fastening holes 1499 are formed on the peripheral surface of the cover 1483, and fastening means such as screws are provided by abutting with the fastening holes 1489 provided in the inlet unit 1481. It is possible to fix the cover 1483 to the inlet unit 1481.

The light emitting substrate 1484 is disposed below the inlet 1480 in the inlet unit 1481, and the first light emitting substrate 1500 that irradiates the periphery of the inlet 1480 and the inlet unit 1481.
The second light-emitting substrate 1501 that irradiates the lower and upper illumination parts 1488 and 1487 on the left side in FIG. 5 from below, and the lower light-emitting part 1488 and the upper illumination part 1487 on the right side in the inlet unit 1481 that irradiates from below. And three light-emitting substrates 1502. Each light emitting substrate 14
84 includes a plurality of light emitting diodes 1503 serving as light emitting sources. In particular, the first light emitting substrate 1500 is separately disposed so as to face each inflow port 1480, and
A two-color light emitting diode capable of selectively switching and emitting light of two colors (for example, red and blue) is mounted. Therefore, some of the inlets 1480 out of the plurality of inlets 1480
When 480 is selected as a specific inlet, the color of light corresponding to the specific inlet and the color of light corresponding to other inlets can be made different from each other.

The base member 1479 has three accommodating portions 1505 for accommodating the first light emitting substrate 1500 and three ball insertion holes 150 that overlap with the plurality of inlets 1480 in the inlet unit 1481, respectively.
6, a window portion 1507 that allows light emitted from the second light emitting substrate 1501 and the third light emitting substrate 1502 to pass therethrough, and a through hole 1508 that penetrates the rotation shaft 1492 are formed. Also,
The lower case 1485 includes an accommodating portion 1509 that accommodates the speed reduction mechanism 1494, and the sorting motor 1.
A through hole 1510 is formed through which the rotational shaft 493 can be inserted. The base member 14
79 and lower case 1485 are formed of a non-conductive member such as resin.

As described above, in the distribution effect device 1444 of this example, all the inlets 1480 are connected to the guide member 1.
Arranged on the player side of the center of rotation of 490, the guide member 1490 is configured to roll the game ball toward the player side. For this reason, the operation of the guide member 1490, the guide member 1
The behavior of the game ball on 490 and the behavior of the game ball flowing into the inflow port 1480 can be clearly seen. In addition, it is possible to make the game ball appear to be sucked into the inflow port 1480, and it is possible to further enhance the interest with respect to the distribution effect device 1444.

In addition, since the bowl-shaped guide member 1490 is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft 1492 having the vertical direction as an axial direction, it is rotated within a predetermined range by the operation of the sorting motor 1493. On the other hand, since the plurality of inlets 1480 are arranged along an arc on a substantially horizontal plane with the rotation axis 1492 as the center, the leading ends of the guide members 1490 can be opposed to the plurality of inlets 1480 in order. , The tip of the guide member 1490 and the respective inlet 148
The distance from 0 can be made substantially constant. Therefore, regardless of which inflow port 1480 is selected, the game ball sent to the guide member 1490 is transferred to the inflow port 1480 at substantially the same timing.
Therefore, it is possible to suppress the variation in production time as much as possible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 90, the guide passage member 1 for guiding the game ball to the distribution effect device 1444.
Reference numeral 445 denotes a pipe-shaped passage component 1513 formed from a transparent resin, and a passage component 15
A game ball formed at the tip of 13 and guided by the passage component 1513 is
3 and the outflow port 1514 to be dropped on the guide member 1490. Outlet 151
4 communicates with an insertion cutout 1498 formed in the cover 1483, and is arranged to drop the game ball toward the rotation center of the guide member 1490. For this reason, the guide member 1
Regardless of the position of 490, the game ball can be fed into the guide member 1490. In other words, it is possible to send the game ball while rotating the guide member 1490, and thus it is possible to predict the whereabouts of the game ball while associating the operation of the guide member 1490 with the timing at which the game ball is sent. become. Moreover, since the path | route structure part 1513 is formed from the transparent member, the behavior of a game ball can be visually recognized from the stage before being sent to the guidance member 1490 of the distribution direction device 1444. Therefore, the guide member 1490 and the passage component 151
3, i.e., the impression that the guiding member 1490 is extended, and even if the size of the distribution effect device 1444 is relatively small, the rolling distance is long. A dynamic performance can be realized. Further, since the rolling distance of the game ball becomes long, it becomes possible to attract the player's attention for a relatively long time.

Further, at the right end portion of the passage constituting portion 1513, a stopping means 1515 supported rotatably by a rotating shaft 1516 and a ball receiving surface 1515a of the stopping means 1515 can be stopped by rotating the rotating shaft 1516. A stop motor 2560 (see FIG. 93) that switches between a release position (shown by a solid line) and a release position (shown by a solid line) is provided.
4, one of the game balls discharged to the discharge path 1518 can be stopped, and the stopped game ball can be released at a predetermined timing (that is, the stopped state is released). The operation of the distribution effect device 1444 will be described later.

[Configuration of main board and peripheral board]
The configuration of the main board and the peripheral board will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93 are block diagrams schematically showing a control configuration. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate the connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate the connection and direction of the signal. The control of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is broadly divided into a group of main boards 2810 (shown in FIG. 92) and a group of peripheral boards 2811 (shown in FIG. 93).
A group of 810 controls game operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and a group of peripheral boards 2811 performs rendering operations (light emission decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display, and decoration body Control).

As shown in FIG. 92, the main board 2810 includes a main control board 2094 and a payout control board 2133.
It consists of and. The main control board 2094 has a CPU 2812 as a central processing unit,
ROM 2813 as a read-only memory, RAM 281 as a readable / writable memory
4 is provided. The CPU 2812 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 2813, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 2811 and the payout control board 2133. In RAM2814,
Information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 2094 is temporarily stored. The main board 2810 is connected to the power supply board 2131 via the power supply relay terminal plate 2860, and operating power is supplied from the power supply board 2131.

The input interface of the main control board 2094 includes a first start port sensor 2416 for detecting a winning state for the first start port 1420 and a second start port sensor 2358 for detecting a winning state for the second start port 1421. An all winning opening winning number counting sensor 2870 is connected to count the number of winning with respect to the winning opening. Further, a gate sensor 2990 for detecting that a game ball has passed through the passage gate 1405 and a right general prize for detecting that a game ball has won the right general prize opening 1419 are provided via the panel relay terminal board 2866. Mouth sensor 2417
a and a left / center general winning opening sensor 2417b for detecting that a game ball has been won in the left and center general winning openings 1419, and a large winning opening relay terminal connected to the panel relay terminal plate 2866 A big prize opening sensor 2370 is connected through a plate 2867. Detection signals from these sensors are input to the main control board 2094. Also connected to the input interface of the main control board 2094 are an inner frame opening switch 2862 for detecting the opening state of the front frame body 11 and a door opening switch 2863 for detecting the opening state of the front frame 4.

On the other hand, the output interface of the panel relay terminal board 2866 has a symbol limiting resistor board 286.
8, a normal symbol / special symbol display board 2869 is connected to the main control board 209.
4 can output a drive signal to a normal symbol display (not shown) and a special symbol display 1428 (see FIG. 74). Further, an attacker solenoid 1429 for driving the opening / closing prize winning device 1404 and a start port solenoid 2352 for driving the movable piece 1427 of the second start port 1421 are connected to the output interface of the large winning port relay terminal board 2867. These drive signals are output from the control board 2094.

On the other hand, the payout control board 2133 includes a CPU 2815 as a central processing unit, a ROM 2816 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 2817 as a readable / writable memory. The payout control board 2133 processes the command signal input from the main control board 2094, and the firing motor 69 connected to the prize ball unit 800 and the firing control board 2865.
5, a drive signal is output. Thereby, the prize ball unit 800 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the launch motor 695 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal. Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the main control board 2094 and the payout control board 2133 via respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 2094 transmits a prize ball command, it responds to this. From the payout control board 2133 to the main control board 2094
An ACK signal is returned. The payout control board 2133 is also connected to a full tank switch 916 that detects that the game balls stored in the full tank unit 900 are full.

Further, an external terminal board 2861 is connected to the main control board 2094 and the payout control board 2133, and the first start port 1420, the second start port 1421 and the winning / opening winning device 1404 are awarded, normal symbols / special symbols. Various information such as the fluctuation state of the game and the game state based on the lottery result,
The information is output to a hall computer or the like provided in a game facility.

On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 2811 includes a peripheral control substrate 2830 and a liquid crystal control substrate 2832 as shown in FIG. The main control board 2094 and the peripheral control board 28 described above.
30, communication in only one direction is performed between each input / output interface and the input interface. Even if a command is transmitted from the main control board 2094 to the peripheral control board 2830, the opposite is true. Is not done. Also, the operating power is supplied from the power supply board 2131 to the peripheral board 2811 via the power supply relay terminal plate 2860.

The peripheral control board 2830 also includes a CPU 2835, a ROM 2835, and a RAM 283.
6 and the like, and a predetermined production control program can be executed by these electronic components. In addition, the peripheral control board 2830 is provided with a ROM 2883 that stores a sound source that is the basis of voice and music, and a sound source IC 2882 that outputs the sound and music according to the production content based on the sound source stored in the ROM 2883. It has been. Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 2830 and the liquid crystal control board 2832 with each input / output interface.

On the other hand, the liquid crystal control board 2832 has a liquid crystal display device 640 (LCD) as an effect display device.
The liquid crystal control board 2832 processes the command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 2830 and outputs a drive signal to the liquid crystal display device 640. More specifically, the liquid crystal control board 2832 includes a CPU 2851, a RAM 2857, a ROM 2854, a V
A DP 2884 and an image ROM 2885 are provided. The CPU 2851 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 2830 through the input interface and performs arithmetic processing based on the command to control the VDP 2884. RAM2
857 provides a work area for the CPU 2851 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 2854 holds a program for the CPU 2851 (for display control).

A VDP (video display processor) 2884 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 640. A register is provided in the VDP 2884, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 2884, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 2851 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode in the liquid crystal display device 640 can be changed variously. The image ROM 2885 is a non-volatile memory for storing various image data, and stores bitmap image data for various display patterns, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

Further, the peripheral control board 2830 is provided with a speaker 16 via a frame decoration relay terminal board 2886.
3, a frame decoration lamp 2893 for optically decorating the front surface of the door frame 5, and an operation ring unit 329 (described as an operation button 330 in FIG. 93 for convenience) disposed on the front surface of the door frame 5. Has been. The peripheral control board 2830 is inputted with operation signals of a button function 330 and a ring function 331, which will be described later, constituting the operation ring unit 329.
On the other hand, from the peripheral control board 2830 to the operation ring unit 329, the operation ring unit 3
A drive signal is output to various electric components (for example, a stepping motor 344 and the like), which will be described later.

Further, the peripheral control board 2830 includes an electrical decoration control board 2890 and an accessory drive control board 289.
1 is connected to the lighting control board 2890, and the plurality of light emitting boards provided in the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440, specifically, the upper light emitting board 2 provided corresponding to the upper portion.
892a, a right light emitting substrate 2892b provided corresponding to the right portion, and a left light emitting substrate 2892c provided corresponding to the left portion are respectively connected. Furthermore, the illumination control board 289
0 includes a stage light emitting substrate 2892d that irradiates the stage 1443 and the distribution effect device 14.
The three sorting light emitting substrates 1484 that are provided at 44 and irradiate the inlet unit 1481 are connected.

<Main control board processing>
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 2094 (particularly the CPU 2812) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 94A is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by the CPU 2812 mounted on the main control board 2094, and FIG. 94B is a flowchart showing an example of a process when a power interruption occurs. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning process. Figure 98
These are flowcharts which show a fluctuation start process. FIG. 99 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display pattern setting process. FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. FIG. 101 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game start process. FIG.
These are flowcharts which show an example of a small hit game start process. FIG. 103 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. FIG. 104 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric accessory small hit control process. The timer interrupt process is performed in the main control board 209.
4 is executed at a predetermined timing (in this embodiment, every 4 ms) by the CPU 2812 mounted on the CPU 4.

As shown in FIG. 94A, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the CPU 281
2 executes power-on processing (step S1). In this power-on process, the RAM 2
It is determined whether the backup data stored in 814 is normal (is the set value when a power failure occurs) or not, and if normal, the state is restored to the state when the power failure occurs according to the backup data stored in RAM 2814. If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM 2814 is cleared and the CPU peripheral device setting (normal initial setting:
Set interrupt timing, etc.). When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM 2814 as backup data. Also,
If the RAM erase switch for instructing clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM 2814 is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM 2814 is cleared and normal initialization is performed. If the backup data is not stored in the RAM 2814 mounted on the main control board 2094 in the power-on process, the RAM 2814 is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In the power-on process, the peripheral control board 2 is set when normal initial setting is executed.
A process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 2094 is activated in 830 to a state where transmission is possible is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 2830 that the main control board 2094 has been activated. In addition, pachinko machine 1 when amusement store is closed
The backup data is also stored in the RAM 2814 even when the power supply to is stopped (when the power is turned off), and when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again, the power-on process is executed.

When the power-on process ends, the CPU 2812 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop processing, the CPU 2812 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by a power supply board (not shown). That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Supplying to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board is equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 2094 is stopped. Sent. And step S2
When the power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 2812 mounted on the main control board 2094, the process at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S4). When the power interruption occurs, the processing of the gaming machine is in the state before the power failure when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery). In order to start from
814 is a process of storing as backup data in 814. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

When the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when power from the external power supply is normally supplied, random number update processing 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game.
Is performed (step S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

FIG. 94 (b) is a flowchart showing an example of the process at the time of power-off occurrence (step S4). As described above, the power-off occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. First, the CPU 2812 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM 2814 is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 2814 (step S4b). This checksum is
This is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 2814 before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

Next, the CPU 2812 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 2814 (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 2812 prohibits access to the RAM 2814 (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In this process, the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a power failure for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power outage”).
Since the power supply voltage is not actually stopped when the process when the power interruption occurs, the above process may not be able to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the CPU 2812 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer,
If the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time, a reset is applied. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when the power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and the infinite loop of FIG. 94 is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the CPU 2812 is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing. As described above, in this embodiment, the CPU 2812 mounted on the main control board 2094 during execution of the main process.
Thus, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 281
2. After executing the register saving process (step S10), the process from step S11 to step S18 is executed. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-described switches (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 in step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation processing in step S13, switch input processing (step S11)
A payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 2133 based on the signal detected at.

In the ordinary symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process of step S14, the ordinary symbol is changed based on the progress of the game, and the ordinary electric accessory (that is, the start port solenoid 235) is changed.
2 to control the movable piece 1427) that is opened and closed by 2, and executes a process of changing the open / closed state of the second start port 1421. In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S15, the special symbol display 1428 displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably on the basis of the progress of the game, or the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker solenoid). The movable piece 1430 opened and closed by the control unit 1429 is controlled to change the open / close state of the special prize opening, etc. In the output data setting process in step S16, the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer or the like).
A process for outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state, a process for outputting a drive signal to a special figure start memory lamp (not shown), and the like are executed. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting the effect command to the peripheral control board 2830 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control board 2830 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. Step S1
When the processing from 1 to step S17 is executed, the register restoration processing (step S18) is executed, and the processing is terminated.

Here, various random numbers updated by the CPU 2812 mounted on the main control board 2094 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (including “small hit” described later) (big hit determination), the big hit determination Is a random number for a big hit symbol used to determine whether or not to make a promiscuous big hit when it is determined that a big hit gaming state will be generated (special change determination), special when a big hit gaming state is determined in the big hit determination Random for jackpot symbol used to determine the symbol to stop the symbol, used to determine whether or not to release with a reach mode when it is determined that the big hit gaming state does not occur in the jackpot determination (reach determination) Reach determination random number, variation used to determine the variation display pattern (variation time) of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 1428 Display pattern random (random number change time) Average per determining random number used for determining whether to control the movable piece 1427 in an open state (usually the lottery per determination), and the like. In this example, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a small hit gaming state using a big hit determination random number. It is also determined whether or not to make a probability variation jackpot (the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than usual) using a jackpot symbol random number. It should be noted that the variation display pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number, and the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol controlled by the liquid crystal display device 640 may be determined.

Among these random numbers, in the random number update processing 1, the big hit determination random number related to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, the big hit symbol random number, and the normal symbol per random number related to whether or not the movable piece 1427 is controlled to be in the open state Update. That is, the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and the movable piece 1
The random number used for the determination regarding whether or not to control 427 to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing in this way, the probability (probability to determine that the big hit gaming state is generated, probability to determine that the movable piece 1427 is controlled to be in the open state) in a predetermined period with each random number can be made constant. It can be prevented that the person becomes disadvantageous. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the reach determination random number and the variable display pattern random number that are not related to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and the normal lottery are updated.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S15). In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process, the CPU 2812 executes the processes from step S20 to step S90. In the start opening winning process in step S20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first start opening 1420 or the second start opening 1421. When winning, a process of updating the lottery hold state is executed. In the variation start process of step S30, the number of starting memories (holding number) in each big hit lottery is confirmed, and if the number of starting memories (total number of starting memories) is not 0, the corresponding special symbol variation display is started. Make settings for
As will be described in detail later, specifically, it is determined whether or not a big hit gaming state (profit granting state) is generated (winning determination means). Respectively. In the variation pattern setting process in step S40, settings related to variation display of each special symbol and each decorative symbol are performed. As will be described in detail later, specifically, a variable display pattern for each special symbol is determined, and a variable time set in accordance with the variable display pattern (the special symbol display unit 1428 starts the variable symbol variable display). Time from stop to stop)
Is set to the timer.

In the changing process of step S50, the timer set with the changing time in the changing display pattern setting process (step S40) is monitored, and the first special symbol display 2390a or the second special symbol display is performed based on the time-out of the timer. Processing to stop the special symbol variation display in the device 2390b (corresponding to the special symbol display 1428) is performed. At this time, change start processing (
If it is determined in step S30) that one of the big win lotteries is in the big hit gaming state, the processing selection flag is updated to “3”, and if it is determined in the same lottery that the small hit gaming state is in effect. Then, the process selection flag is updated to “4”, and if it is not determined that the game state is a big hit or small hit gaming state, the process selection flag is updated to “0”.

In the big hit game start process (profit granting state control means) in step S60, settings for starting the big hit game state are performed. Although specifically described later, the movable piece 14 according to the type of jackpot
The number of times of opening 30 and the opening time are set. In addition, in the small hit game start process in step S70, setting for starting the small hit game state is performed. Specifically, as described later, the number of times of opening the movable piece 1430 at the small hit, the opening time, and the like are set. In the special electric utility jackpot control process of step S80, the winning a prize opening is opened and the movable piece 1430 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the winning a prize opening or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Process. Further, if the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has not reached the predetermined number, the process for opening the movable piece 1430 is performed again. When the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has reached the predetermined number, Is updated to “5”. In addition, after the number of rounds reaches a predetermined number, processing for generating a probability variation state and a short-time gaming state is executed (special gaming state control means). In the special electric accessory small hit control process of step S90,
When the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined number of game balls have won the grand prize opening, or
When the predetermined period has elapsed, a process for closing the movable piece 1430 is performed. As will be described in detail later, the opening of the big prize opening in the special electric accessory small hit control process is such that the profit to the player is extremely low compared to the special electric accessory big hit control process (step S80). Is set. Next, specific processing in steps S20 to S90 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the start opening prize process, first, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start opening sensor 2358, and when the detection signal is output from the second start opening sensor 2358, , It is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 1421 (YE in step S201).
S), if the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2358 is not output, the second start port 14
It is determined that the game ball has not won 21 (NO in step S201). Step S2
When it is determined at 01 that the game ball has won the second starting port 1421, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (random numbers for big hit determination, random numbers for big hit symbols, etc.) are acquired and provided in the RAM 2814. It is determined whether or not the value of the second reserved ball number counter is less than 4 which is the upper limit value (
Step S202). If the second held ball number counter is less than 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S2).
04) is executed. These processes will be described later. If the value of the second reserved ball number counter is 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

On the other hand, if the detection signal is not output from the second start port sensor 2358 in step S201 (NO in step S201), or if the value of the second reserved ball number counter is 4 (
If NO in step S202, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 1420 (step S205). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 2416. When it is determined in step S205 that a game ball has won at the first start port 1420 (YES), various random numbers for the first big hit lottery are obtained, and the RAM 2814
It is determined whether or not the value of the first reserved ball number counter provided in is less than 4 which is the upper limit value (step S206). If the first held ball number counter is less than 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are executed. If the value of the first reserved ball number counter is 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

As shown in FIG. 98, in the variation start process, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “0”.
If it is “0” (YES in step S301), the processing after step S302 is executed, and if it is not “0” (NO in step S301), the variation start processing is terminated. In step S302, it is determined whether or not the values (the first start memory number and the second start memory number) of the two reserved ball number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 2390a and 2390b are “0”. . The sum of the values of the two reserved ball counters indicates the number of random numbers stored in the start memory storage area (special symbol random number storage means 2939, 2940 (see FIG. 115)). The value of any of the reserved ball counters is “0”
If it is (YES), it is determined that the start condition regarding the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S317.

On the other hand, if the value of any of the reserved ball counters is not “0” in step S302 (NO)
Then, start memory transfer processing is executed (steps S303 to S311). 115 (a
), The first special symbol random number storage means 2939 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 2939a to storage area [4] 2939d).
1 ”to“ 4 ”). In addition, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 2940 also includes four storage areas (storage areas [1] 2940).
a to storage area [4] 2940d), the second starting memory number ("1" to "4")
Is associated with each value. Each storage area 2939a-2939d, 2940a-
2940d has a big hit determination random number storage area 2946 for storing the big hit determination random number and a big hit determination random number storage area 2947 for storing the big hit determination random number. In the start memory transfer process, first, whether or not the value of the reserved ball number counter (second start memory number) corresponding to the second special symbol display 2390b is “0”, that is, the second special symbol random number. It is determined whether or not a random number is stored in the storage area [1] 2940a of the storage unit 2940 (step S303). Various random numbers stored in the areas (storage area [2] 2940b to storage area [4] 2940d) are shifted to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 2940a to storage area [3] 2940c), respectively. A process (step S304) and a process (step S305) of acquiring a random number related to the second special symbol stored in the storage area [1] 2940a are executed. Further, “1” is set to the special symbol variation flag (step S306), and a process of subtracting “1” from the reserved ball number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is executed (step S307).

On the other hand, when the random number is not stored in the storage area [1] 2940a of the second special symbol random number storage means 939, that is, the value of the reserved ball number counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 2390b is “0”. (YES in step S303), first special symbol random number storage means 2
Various random numbers stored in each of the nth storage areas (storage area [2] 2939b to storage area [4] 2939d) of 939 are stored in the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [storage area [ 1
2939a to storage area [3] 2939c) (step S308)
And the process (step S309) which acquires the random number regarding the 1st special symbol memorize | stored in storage area [1] 2939a is performed. Further, a process of subtracting “1” from the reserved ball number counter corresponding to the first special symbol (step S311) is executed. That is, regarding the first special symbol, when holding, as in the case of the second special symbol, the value of the held ball number counter (first start memory number) is increased by “1” and the extracted random number is increased. , Stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the first start memory number, but only when the second start memory number is "0" when starting the change of the first special symbol, that is, according to the first special symbol Each random number is read from the first storage area “1” 2939a of the first special symbol random number storage means 2939 only when the first processing is waiting and the second processing by the second special symbol is not waiting. I have to. This control enables the second process to be performed with priority over the first process.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312). If not the probability variation state (NO in step S312),
A jackpot determination table when the probability variation is not activated, that is, a table set with a low probability of being a jackpot, is selected. On the other hand, in the case of the probability variation state (YES in step S312), Select a table with a high probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when the probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, normal), the probability of a big hit is 6 /
When the probability fluctuation is activated (that is, when the probability is high), the probability of being a big hit is 60.
/ 499.

After any table is selected in step S313 or step S314, the random number related to any special symbol obtained in step S305 or step S309 based on the table is a random number corresponding to the big hit (big hit value) It is determined whether or not (step S315). If it is a big hit value (YES in step S315), the big hit flag is set to "ON" (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. On the other hand, when the acquired random number is not a big hit value (NO in step S315),
It is determined whether or not the random number is a random number corresponding to a small hit (small hit value) (step S31).
8). If it is a small hit value (YES in step S318), the small hit flag is set to “ON” (step S319), and the process proceeds to step S317. NO in S318), without going through step S319
The process proceeds to step S317. In step S317, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated. Note that the ON / OFF states (set state and reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in the RAM 814. The OFF state (reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag means that a value of “0” is set, and the ON state (set state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is a value of “1”. Is set.

In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 99, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “1”.
If “1” is obtained in step S317 (YES in step S401), the process from step S402 is executed, and if not “1” (NO in step S401).
) Ends the variation pattern setting process. In step S402, the big hit flag is “O
N ”is determined and if“ ON ”is determined in step S316 (step S316)
If YES in 402), it is determined based on the acquired random number whether the big hit is a probability big hit or a normal big hit (step S403). If the probability variation big hit (YES in step S403), it is determined whether or not a special hit is made (step S4).
04). As will be described in detail later, any of the probability variation jackpots is “in the subsequent lottery, the probability variation state in which the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than usual, and any of the special symbol indicators 1428 is set. A short game state is generated when the variation time of the special symbol that fluctuates is shortened (relatively shorter than the normal time) and the ease of winning a prize at the second start port 1421 is increased more than usual. In other words, the probability variation jackpot that is a special hit and the general probability variation jackpot that is not a special hit are set so that the level of profit given to the player is greatly different. In other words, in the general probability fluctuation big hit, the movable piece 14
The opening time per 30 is set to a time that allows a plurality of (for example, 10) game balls to be awarded with plenty of room, and the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1430 provides many benefits. The number of times (for example, 7 times) is controlled. On the other hand, in the probability variation big hit that is a special hit, the opening time per one of the movable pieces 1430 is set to a time that can barely win several (for example, one or two) game balls. The opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1430 is controlled to be performed twice, for example.

If it is determined in step S404 that it is not a special hit, that is, if it is determined that it is a general probability fluctuation big hit (NO), a probability variation big hit variation display pattern table is selected (step S405), while a special hit is determined. If it is determined that it is a hit (YES in step S404), the probability variation special hit fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step S406). If it is determined in step S403 that the probability variation is not big hit, that is, if it is decided that the normal big hit is made (YES), the normal big hit fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step S407).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is “ON” (step S408), and “ON” is determined in step S319. If YES (YES in step S408), the small hit variation display pattern table is selected (step S409). When the small hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S408), it is determined whether or not the acquired reach determination random number is a random number (reach value) corresponding to reach (step S410). ) If it is a reach value (YES in step S410), a deviation reach fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step 411). If it is not a reach value (NO in step S410), a deviation fluctuation display is performed. A pattern table is selected (step S412).

As described above, when the variable display pattern table is selected in any step, the variable display pattern is selected based on the variable display pattern table and the variable display pattern random number acquired in either step S305 or step S309. Is determined (step S413). Next, a selection value is set as an effect command for designating the variation display pattern determined in step S413 (step S414), and a variation time corresponding to the variation display pattern is set in a timer provided in the RAM 2814 mounted on the main control board 2094. (
In this embodiment, the valid period timer is set (step S415). Step S
In 415, the variation time set in the variation display pattern determined in step S413 is set in the effective period timer. Note that the variable display pattern command set in step S414 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 2830 by command transmission output processing. When a variable display pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 2830 by command transmission output processing, a drive signal is output to the first special symbol display 2390a and the second special symbol display 2390b, and the special symbol variation display is started. Let Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S416), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

In the changing process shown in FIG. 100, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “2” (step S501).
If YES in step S502, the processes in and after step S502 are executed. If not "2" (step S5)
If NO at 01), the changing process is terminated. In step S502, the first special symbol display 2390a or the second special symbol display 2390b determines whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the symbol or the second special symbol is up (step S503). When the fluctuation time is up, that is, when the fluctuation time is over (YES in step S503).
Then, the fluctuation is stopped (step S504). If none of the special symbols have changed (NO in step S502), or if the change time has not ended (NO in step S503), the special symbols are changing without being stopped. The process ends.

After stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol in step S504, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is “ON” (step S505). If the big hit flag is “ON”, the processing flag is updated to “3”. (Step S506). On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S505), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is “ON” (step S5).
07), in the case of “ON”, the processing flag is updated to “4” (step S508), and “ON”
If not, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S509). In this way, after the processing flag is updated in any of step S506, step S508, or step S509, the changing process is ended.

In the jackpot game start process shown in FIG. 101, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “3”.
If “3” is obtained in step S506 (YES in step S601).
If the process after step S602 is not “3” (NO in step S601), the big hit game start process is terminated. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state is present. If the probability variation state is present (YES),
The operation of the probability variation function is temporarily stopped, and the process proceeds to step S604. In the case where the state is not the probability variation state, that is, in the normal low probability state (NO in step S602),
The process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. Step S6
In 04, it is determined whether or not the short-time function is being operated, that is, whether or not the short-time game state is in effect. Migrate to On the other hand, if it is not the short-time gaming state (NO in step S604), the process proceeds to step S606 without executing the process in step S605.

In step S606, it is determined whether the type of jackpot is a general jackpot or a special jackpot. If the jackpot is a general jackpot (NO in step S606), the condition for opening the jackpot by the movable piece 1430 is determined. That is, the number of times of opening for big hits (for example, a maximum of 7 times), the opening time for each time (for example, a maximum of 18 seconds), and the limited number of winnings to a big winning opening (for example, a maximum of 10 per time) are set (step S607). ). On the other hand, if the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S606), the special winning opening number (for example, twice) at the big winning opening (for example, twice), the winning limit number (for example, 6), and the opening time per time. (For example, 1.8 seconds) is set (step S608). Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “5” (step S609), and the big hit game start process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the small hit game start process shown in FIG. 102, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “4”. If it is “4” in step S508 (Y in step S701).
ES), the processing of step S702 and step S703 is executed, and if the processing flag is not “4” (NO in step S701), the small hit game start processing is executed without executing the processing of step S702 and step S703. finish. In step S702, the condition for opening the big prize opening in the case of a small hit, that is, the number of small winning openings for the big prize opening by the movable piece 1430, and the opening time per one are set. In addition, the number of opening in small hits,
The number of winning restrictions and the opening time are the conditions set for special wins (step S608).
Are set to be the same. That is, the special hit and the small hit are set so that they cannot be visually discriminated. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6” (step S703), and the small hit game start process is terminated.

In the special electric utility jackpot control process shown in FIG. 103, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “5”, and if it is “5” in step S609 (YES in step S801), step If the processing after S802 is executed and it is not “5” (step S8)
NO at 01), the special electric utility jackpot control process is terminated. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening is open. If it is open (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big prize opening reaches a predetermined time set in advance. It is determined whether or not (step S80
3) If it has elapsed (YES in step S803), the movable piece 1430 is actuated to close the special winning opening (step S805). Even if the set opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S803), the number of game balls won in the big winning opening after the big winning opening is opened is the limited number set in step S607. If (for example, 10) is exceeded (YES in step S804), the process proceeds to step S805 to close the special winning opening. Also, the opening time of the special winning opening has not reached the set time (NO in step S803).
In addition, if the number of winning game balls has not reached the limit (NO in step S804), the special electric utility big hit control process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S802, when the big winning opening is not open (NO), the number of opening of the big winning opening by the movable piece 1430 is set in the number of big hits opened in step S607 or in step S608. It is determined whether or not the special hit opening number has been reached (step S806). If not reached (NO in step S806)
), The movable piece 1430 is controlled to open the special winning opening (step S807), and the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated. As a result, a large amount of game balls can be awarded to the grand prize opening.

In step S806, when the number of times of opening the grand prize opening reaches the set number of times (YES
), That is, when the big hit gaming state is finished, step S808 to step S81.
Step 3 is executed, and the game state for the subsequent lottery is set. Specifically, first, the jackpot flag is set to “OFF” (step S808), and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a win that activates the probability variation function (step S809). That is, it is determined whether the probability variation big hit including the special hit or the normal big hit. If the winning is a probability variation jackpot (YES in step S809), the operation of the probability variation function is started and a probability variation state with a high probability is set (step S810). That is, in the subsequent lottery, the probability of winning the jackpot is set higher than usual, and the time-shortening function is activated until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol due to the lottery reaches a predetermined number (a specified number) . If the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S811), it is determined whether or not the probability variation function or the short-time function is in operation (step S814). If it is not a special hit, that is, if it is a general probability fluctuation big hit (NO in step S810), or if the special hit is won when the probability fluctuation function or the time reduction function is already activated, The operation is started (step S812), and then the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S813). That is, the first special symbol display 2390a or the second special symbol display 23
The fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that fluctuates at 90b is shortened, and the ease of winning a prize to the second start port 1421 is increased by higher speed than usual by opening the movable piece 1427. On the other hand, when the probability variation function and the short-time function are not in operation, that is, when neither the probability variation state nor the short-time gaming state has occurred, the special win is won (step S814).
NO), the process proceeds to step S813 without operating the time reduction function.

On the other hand, if it is not a win that activates the probability variation function in step S809, that is, if it is a normal big hit (NO), the operation of the time reduction function is started and the specified number of operations in the time reduction function is set (step S815). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S813. That is, the time-shortening function is operated until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol due to the lottery reaches a predetermined number (specified number).

In the special electric accessory small hitting control process shown in FIG. 104, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “6”. If it is “6” in step S703 (YES in step S901), If the processing after step S902 is executed and it is not “6” (step S9)
NO at 01), the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls won for the big prize opening has reached a preset maximum number of winnings (step S902). If the maximum number of winnings has not been reached yet (NO) Then, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening is open (step S903). If it is determined in step S903 that the special winning opening is open (YES), whether the opening time of the special winning opening (elapsed time after opening) has reached a predetermined time set in advance. If it has elapsed (YES in step S904), the movable piece 1430 is actuated to close the special winning opening (step S905). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of times that the special winning opening is opened has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) (step S906).
YES), the process flag is updated to “0” (step S907), and the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated. If the opening time of the special winning opening has not reached the predetermined time in step S904 (NO), or if the number of opening has not reached the predetermined number in step S906 (NO), the process of step S907 is executed. Then, the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated. In step S903, if the big prize opening is not open (NO), the big prize opening is opened, and the game ball can be won (step S908). In step S902, if the number of game balls won for the big prize opening reaches the preset maximum number of prizes (YES), it is determined whether or not the big prize opening is open (step S9).
09) If it is open (YES), the special winning opening is closed (step S910), and the process proceeds to step S907. On the other hand, when the special winning opening is not open (NO in step S909), the process proceeds to step S907 without executing the process of step S910. In step S907, the processing flag is updated to “0”.

<Processing of peripheral control board>
Next, processing executed by the integrated CPU 2834 mounted on the peripheral control board 2830 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-main process.
06 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady process.

As shown in FIG. 105, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the integrated CPU 283 is used.
4 performs an initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the integrated RAM 2836 mounted on the peripheral control board 2830 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

In this embodiment, the integrated CPU 2834 generates an interrupt every 2 ms and 2 ms
Execute steady processing. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses A process of setting the flag T and resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process.
Is normally set (set), and is normally set (reset) to “0”. Step S100
When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set at 2 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S1004).

In the 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the liquid crystal display device 640, the frame lamp, the game board lamp, the speaker, and the like is executed based on the effect command received from the main control board 2094. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S1002 again, and every time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, the above-described steps S1003 to S1 are performed.
Repeat 004. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the sub-integrated CPU 2834 executes the processes of steps S1100 to S1600. In the command analysis process in step S1100, the effect command received from the main control board 2094 is analyzed. Step S1
In the effect control process 200, a control process related to the liquid crystal display device 640 is executed based on the variable display pattern command. Specifically, setting of notice effect, determination of stop pattern of decorative design,
Etc.

In the sound control process in step S1300, a sound effect (for example, B
Control processing related to the speaker for generating (GM) is executed. Step S1400
In the lamp control process, control processes related to the game board lamp and the frame lamp are executed. In the information output process of step S1500, a lamp effect command is transmitted to the electrical decoration control board 2890 and the accessory drive control board 2891. In the random number update process in step S1600, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed.

In addition, the process of step S1100 to step S1600 in the 16 ms steady process is 1
Finish within 6ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady processing to the end of the 16 ms steady processing, the 16 ms steady processing is started from the beginning immediately after the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady processing (step S1100 described later). Do not execute) That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, 16 ms
Start steady processing.

In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S1600) is performed in a 16 ms steady process.
) Is executed to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is not limited to this. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 ms steady process.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing (step S1100). In the command analysis process, the integrated CPU 2834 first determines whether or not an effect command has been received from the main control board 2094 (step S1101). In this embodiment, when an effect command is received from the main control board 2094, other processes such as a 16 ms steady process are interrupted to generate a command reception interrupt process, and the received command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 283.
It is stored in the received command storage area in the integrated RAM 2836 mounted on 0. The reception command storage area is provided with a plurality of areas corresponding to the reception order of the effect commands, and in the command reception interrupt process, the reception command storage areas are stored in the areas corresponding to the reception order of the effect commands. Step S1
In 101, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if the production command is stored,
An effect command whose reception order is in the reception command storage area is read out (step S1102).

Then, it is determined whether or not the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (step S1103). If the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (YES in step S1103), a variable display pattern reception flag is set. Then, it is stored in the variable display pattern storage area in the integrated RAM 2836 mounted on the peripheral control board 2830 (step S1104).

On the other hand, if the read effect command is not a variable display pattern command (step S1)
If NO in 103, it is determined whether or not the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command (step S1105), and if the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command (step S).
If YES in 1105), the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S1106). Also,
If the read production command is not a probable big hit command (NO in step S1105)
), A flag corresponding to the received effect command is set (step S1107).

FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S1200). In the effect control process, the integrated CPU 2834 performs one of steps S1210 to S1230 with reference to the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game.

Decorative symbol variation start process (step S121) executed when the process selection flag is “0”
In 0), if a variable display pattern command is received, a setting for starting the variable display of decorative symbols is performed. Specifically, the decorative symbol stop symbol is determined according to the variable display pattern command and the probability variation jackpot command, and a notice effect is set.

Decorative symbol variation process executed when the process selection flag is “1” (step S1220)
Then, when the change stop command is received, a display command is transmitted to the electrical decoration control board 2832 to perform control to stop the change display of the decorative symbols.

In the jackpot display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, the liquid crystal display device 640 is responded to the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 2094.
Control for displaying the start of the big hit gaming state and the display during the big hit gaming state (for example, round display) is performed.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). In the decorative symbol variation start process, the integrated CPU 2834 first determines whether or not the variation display pattern reception flag is set (step S1221). The variable display pattern reception flag is set in step S110 of the command analysis process (step S1100) described above.
4 is a flag indicating that a variation display pattern command has been received from the main control board 2094. If the variable display pattern reception flag is not set in step S1221, (NO), it is determined that the variable display pattern command has not been received, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the variable display pattern reception flag is set (Y in step S1221)
ES), the variable display pattern reception flag is reset (step S1222), and it is determined whether the variable display pattern based on the received variable display pattern command is a variable display pattern that generates a big hit (whether it is a hit pattern) (step S1223a). ).

If the variable display pattern is not a winning pattern (NO in step S1223a), a stop symbol for the off symbol is determined (step S1224). If the variable display pattern is a winning pattern (YES in step S1223a), it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S1223b), and if the probability variation big hit flag is set (YES).
) Determines the stop symbol of the probability variation jackpot symbol (step S1225), and if the probability variation jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S1223b), determines the stop symbol of the non-probability variation jackpot symbol (step S1226). In addition, the probability variation jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot gaming state is started in the jackpot display process (step S1230). Note that the time when the probability variation big hit flag is reset is not limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol variation process (step S
In 1220), when the decorative symbol variation display is stopped, specifically, when the variation stop command is received, it may be reset, or the jackpot display processing (step S1230)
It may be reset when the big hit gaming state is ended.

In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol corresponding 1: 1 with the first special symbol, the second decorative symbol corresponding 1: 1 with the second special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol. A common decorative symbol sequence (hereinafter referred to as “common decorative symbol sequence”) associated with both symbols and corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. The first decorative design and the second decorative design are
It is composed of combinations of figures such as round, cross, and sakaku. Presets include combinations that are probable big hit symbols, combinations that are not probable big hits (usually big hits), combinations that are small hits, and combinations that are out of place. ing. In other words, if the variable display pattern is a winning pattern, the combination symbol of the combination set as the probable big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol or the combination set as the non-probable big hit symbol is stopped. Determine as a symbol.

Next, the integrated CPU 2834 executes a notice selection process for determining whether or not a notice effect is to be executed based on the notice determination random number (step S1227), and then the change display pattern and the notice stored in the notice type storage area. Pattern and steps S1225, S1226, S12
A display command corresponding to the stop symbol of the common decorative symbol sequence determined in 27 is set (step S1228). Then, the process selection flag is updated to “1” and the process ends (step S1229). The display command set in step S1228 is transmitted to the illumination control board 2832 in the information output process (step S1500), and the display CPU 2851 mounted on the illumination control board 2832 receives the display command. Based on this, the liquid crystal display device 640 starts execution of the decorative symbol variation display. When the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S1228, the contents of the notice type storage area are cleared after reading the notice pattern. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notice effect based on the notice pattern determined when the previous decoration pattern change display is erroneously started in the next decoration design change display from being executed.

<Functional configuration for production display>
Next, a functional configuration related to the effect display including the special symbol, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the common decorative symbol sequence will be described based on the block diagrams of FIGS. FIG.
0 shows a functional configuration related to the first big hit lottery on the main control board 2094, FIG. 111 shows a functional configuration related to the second big hit lottery on the main control board 2094, and FIG. FIG. 113 shows a functional configuration related to a normal lottery on the main control board 2094, and FIG. 114 shows a peripheral board 2811 (mainly peripheral). The functional structure regarding the production | presentation in the control board 2830, the electrical decoration control board 2890, and the accessory drive control board 2891) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 110, the main control board 2094 includes a first hit determination table 2911a, a first hit symbol table 2912a, a first hit fluctuation time setting table 2913a, and a configuration related to the first big hit lottery. First deviation fluctuation time setting table 2914a
Is stored in advance, and based on these tables 2911a to 2914a, whether or not the lottery is selected in the first big hit lottery, the stop symbol in the first special symbol indicator 2390a, and the variation time are determined. The first hit determination table 2911a shows the relationship between the big hit determination random number value and the success or failure of the big hit or the small hit, and the winning ratio is different between the normal time and the high probability. The first hit symbol table 2912a shows the relationship between the big hit symbol random number value and the stop symbol in the first special symbol indicator 2390a. The range is associated with the lighting state of the two LEDs (first special symbol). The first hit time varying time setting table 2913a is used when the result of winning or failing in the first big hit lottery is big hit or small hit, and the first random time random number and the first special symbol display 2390a that are extracted. The first off time variation time setting table 2914a is used when the result of winning or failing in the first big hit lottery is out of the way and is extracted. It shows the relationship between the random time for variation time and the variation time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 2390a. Note that the first lottery probability selection means 2920a performs processing for selecting one of the normal table and the high probability table based on the gaming state. Also,
Although not shown, the first hit symbol table 2912a includes a probability variation big hit table, a special hit table, a normal big hit table, and a small hit table, which will be described later. A table corresponding to the type of winning determined by the first winning / failing determining means 2930a is selected.

The main control board 2094 has a random counter (random number generating means) when a winning to the first starting opening 1420 is detected by the first starting opening sensor 2416 (corresponding to the first winning state detecting means of the present invention). First hit determination random number extraction means 29 for extracting the big hit determination random number from
16a and a first winning symbol random number extracting means 2917a for extracting a big bonus symbol random number. In addition, first variation time random number extraction means 2918a is provided for extracting variation time random numbers based on the determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers. When the big hit determination random number is extracted by the first hit determination random number extraction means 2916a, the first hit determination table 29
When the big hit symbol random number is extracted by the first hit symbol determining means 2930a and the first hit symbol random number extracting means 2917a using 11a, the first hit symbol design table 2912a is used to First stop symbol determining means 2931a for determining a stop symbol in the special symbol indicator 2390a is provided. Further, when the random time random number extraction means 2918a extracts the random time for variation time, and the first hit / fail determination means 2930a determines that it is a big hit, the first variation time random time setting table 2913a is used. When the variation time of the first special symbol is determined, and when the variation time random number is extracted and determined to be out of the range by the first success / failure determination means 2930a, the first out-of-range variation time setting table 2914a is determined. First variation time determining means 2 for determining the variation time of the first special symbol using
932a is provided.

The main control board 2094 also starts the first special symbol change in the first special symbol display 2390a and determines the first stop symbol after the variation time determined by the first variation time determination means 2932a elapses. A special symbol fluctuation control means 2934 for variably stopping at the stop symbol determined by the means 2931a, a success / failure command relating to the presence / absence of the big hit determined by the first success / failure determination means 2930a before the first special symbol fluctuation start, Command transmission means 2935 for transmitting a control command including a variation display command corresponding to the variation mode (time) of the special symbol is provided. Further, the main control board 2094 has a fixed number of balls (four times) when a winning to the first start port 1420 is detected by the first start port sensor 2416 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. ) Is counted as an upper limit, and the first start memory number is counted and stored, and the first reserved digesting means 2922a is provided to repeatedly display the first special symbol as many times as the start memory number. In other words, the first holding digesting means 2922a for waiting for execution of the first process based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 2416 is provided. The first reservation digesting means 2922a will be described in more detail. First suspended digestion means 2
922a is provided with a first hold control means 2941a and a first digestion control means 2942a, and the first hold control means 2941a
When the first start port sensor 2416 detects a winning to the first start port 1420, if the first start memory number does not reach the upper limit value “4”, the value of the first start memory number is set to “1”. In addition, the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are extracted, and each extracted random number is stored in the highest-order storage area in the first special symbol random number storage means 2939. on the other hand,
In the first digestion control means 2942a, when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and the variation of the new first special symbol becomes possible, the start memory number related to the first special symbol is “0”. Otherwise, the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the starting stored number [1], the value of the first starting stored number is reduced by “1”, and each storage Each random number value stored in the area n is shifted to n-1 storage areas.

As shown in FIG. 111, the main control board 2094 includes a second hit determination table 2911b, a second hit symbol table 2912b, and a second hit variable time setting table 2913b as configurations relating to the second big hit lottery. , And second out-of-run time setting table 29
41b is stored in advance, and based on these tables 2911b to 2914b, whether or not the lottery is selected in the second big hit lottery, the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 2390b, and the variation time are determined. Since the configuration of each table is the same as the configuration of each table in the first big hit lottery, detailed description is omitted here.

The main control board 2094 has a second start port 142 by a second start port sensor 2358.
A second hit determination random number extracting means 2916b for extracting a big hit determination random number relating to the second big hit lottery when a winning to 1 is detected, and a second hit symbol for extracting a big hit symbol random number relating to the second big hit lottery Random number extraction means 2917b and second variation time random number extraction means 2918b for extracting variation time random numbers based on determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers are provided.
Further, when the big hit determination random number extraction means 2916b extracts the big hit determination random number, the second hit determination means 2930b for determining whether or not the big hit is determined using the second hit determination table 2911b, and the second hit symbol When the big hit symbol random number is extracted by the random number extracting means 2917b, the second special symbol indicator 2390b is used by using the second hit symbol table 2912b.
There is provided second stop symbol determining means 2931b for determining a stop symbol at. Further, when the random time for variation time is extracted by the random number extraction unit for second variation time 2918b and the big hit determination is determined by the second success / failure determination unit 2930b, the second variation time variation time setting table 2913b is used. When the variation time of the second special symbol is determined and the random number for variation time is extracted and determined to be out of place by the second success / failure determination unit 2930b, the second out-of-variation variation time setting table 2914b The second variation time determination means 2932b is provided for determining the variation time of the second special symbol by using. The second win / fail decision means 29
30b is provided with a winning restriction means 2921b, and a restriction is applied so that “special jackpot” which is a jackpot that does not give a specific profit to the player is not generated.

The special symbol variation control means 2934 starts the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 2390b, and after the lapse of the variation time determined by the second variation time determination unit 2932b, The change is stopped at the stop symbol determined by the stop symbol determining means 2931b. Further, the main control board 2094 has a fixed number of balls (four times) when the second starting port sensor 2358 detects winning in the second starting port 1421 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. ) Is counted as an upper limit, and the second start memory number is counted and stored, and the second special symbol 292 is repeatedly displayed for the start memory number.
2b is provided. In other words, the second reserved digesting means 2922b for waiting for the execution of the second process based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port sensor 2358 is provided. The second reservation digesting means 2922b will be described in further detail. The second reservation control means 2922b is provided with a second reservation control means 2941b and a second digestion control means 2942b, and the second reservation control means 2941b is used during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When the second start port sensor 2358 detects a winning to the second start port 1421, if the second start stored number has not reached the upper limit value “4”, the value of the second start stored number is set to “1”. While increasing, the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are extracted, and each extracted random number is stored in the uppermost storage area in the second special symbol random number storage means 2940. On the other hand, when the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and the change of the new second special symbol becomes possible, the second digestion control means 2942b has the start memory number related to the second special symbol “ If it is not “0”, the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the starting stored number [1], the second starting stored number is decreased by “1”, and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to n-1 storage areas.

Further, as shown in FIG. 112, the main control board 2094 has a first success / failure determination unit 2930a.
Or, based on the lottery result by the second winning / decision determining means 2930b, five advantageous game state control means for providing a game state advantageous to the player are provided. Here, the advantageous game state includes opening the movable piece 1430 and allowing a game ball to be awarded to the big prize opening. The specific profit granting means 2981 or the predetermined profit granting means 2982 The movable piece 1430 of the open / close prize winning device 1404 is controlled to be opened by either one of them.

More specifically, the predetermined profit granting means 2982 sets the opening time per one movable piece 1430 as a first predetermined time that allows several (for example, 1 to 2) game balls to barely win, By performing the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1430 at least once (in this example, twice), a predetermined profit is given to the player. This makes it possible to win a predetermined number of game balls in the big winning opening, but since the number that can be won is extremely small, the profit received by the player is relatively small. On the other hand, the specific profit granting means 2981
The opening time of the movable piece 1430 is set to a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of (for example, ten) game balls to win a prize, and the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1430 has a predetermined profit. The player is given a specific benefit by performing more times (in this example, seven times) than the number of times of opening and closing operations. According to this, it becomes possible to make a large number of game balls enter the big winning opening, and the player can obtain a large profit.

The main control board 2094 is provided with a first advantageous gaming state control means 2933a and a second advantageous gaming state control means 2933b as means for giving a specific profit by the specific profit giving means 2981, and a predetermined profit giving means 2982. As means for giving a predetermined profit by the third advantageous game state control means 2933c, fourth advantageous game state control means 2933d
, And fifth advantageous gaming state control means 2933e.

The first advantageous gaming state generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 2933a is a so-called “probability change big hit”, and the first success / failure determination means 2930a or the second success / failure determination means 2930b.
Occurs when the lottery result is the first result. When this hits, specific profit granting means 2981
And a high probability state setting unit 2983 sets a probability that a specific profit is given in a subsequent lottery higher than usual. That is, a probability variation state with a high probability is assumed. In this example, in the jackpot determination table at high probability, 0 to 49.
Of the 499 jackpot determination random numbers up to 8, 60 jackpot determination values determined to generate a jackpot gaming state are set, and the jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot, is 60/49
Nine. On the other hand, in the normal big hit determination table, six big hit determination values are set out of 499 big hit determination random numbers from 0 to 498, and the big hit probability is 6/499. In the first advantageous gaming state, the first short symbol state setting means 2984 allows the first special symbol display unit 2390a or the second special symbol display unit 2390b to change the variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In addition to shortening the frequency, the frequency at which the movable piece 1427 of the second start port 1421 is opened and closed until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery) is increased. The second starting port 14
Increase the ease of winning the 21st prize than usual. In other words, the short-time gaming state is set.

The second advantageous gaming state generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 2933b is a so-called “ordinary big hit”, and occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / failing determining means 2930a or the second winning / failing determining means 2930b is the second result. To do. In this win, the specific profit is given by the specific profit granting means 2981 in the same way as in the first advantageous gaming state, but in this win, the probability that the specific profit will be given in the subsequent lottery Remains a low probability. That is, the probability fluctuation state is not entered, and the normal probability is maintained. Even in this second advantageous gaming state,
After giving a specific profit, until the number of changes of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, the temporary short state setting means 2984 enters the short-time gaming state, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol The holding time of the game ball is suppressed by shortening the variation time of the two special symbols and increasing the frequency with which the movable piece 1427 is opened and closed (that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery).

The third advantageous gaming state generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 2933c is a so-called “special big hit”, and occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 2930a is the third result. In this win, first, a predetermined profit is given to the player by a predetermined profit giving means 2982 (a profit having a lower advantage than a specific profit). For the subsequent lottery, the probability that a specific profit is given is increased. That is, as in the first advantageous gaming state, the probability variation state is set. However, the short-time gaming state is generated only when the gaming state before the advantageous gaming state is generated satisfies a predetermined condition. That is, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs when the state is not the probability variation state and is not the short-time gaming state, the short-time gaming state is not generated and the probability variation state is set. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short-time gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state occurs, the second short-time state setting means 2985 is activated to generate the short-time gaming state. Yes.

The fourth advantageous gaming state generated by the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 2933d occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 2930a is the fourth result. At this time, as in the third advantageous gaming state, a predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit giving means 2982. However, for the subsequent lottery, a new probability fluctuation state is not generated. Whether or not the short-time gaming state is added is determined based on the gaming state.

The fifth advantageous game state generated by the fifth advantageous game state control means 2933e occurs when the lottery result of the first win / fail decision means 2930a is the fifth result. At this time, a predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit giving means 2982, and the high probability state setting means 2
Giving a predetermined profit by 983 is the same as in the third advantageous gaming state, but in this advantageous gaming state, if the third advantageous gaming state occurs when it is not the short-time gaming state, It is in a probability fluctuation state without being generated. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs, the second short-time state setting means 2985 is operated to generate the short-time gaming state.

In this example, the winning ratio of each big hit is distributed differently in the case of the first winning / failing determination means 2930a and the second winning / failing determination means 2930b. Specifically, in the lottery result of the first win / fail determination means 2930a, the first advantageous gaming state control means 2933 is obtained.
The first big hit generated by a, that is, the probability fluctuation big hit to which both the probability fluctuation state and the fixed number of short-time gaming states are given is set to 22% of the whole big hit and is generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 2933b. The second big hit, that is, the normal big hit where the short game state is given a certain number of times without being given the probability variation state is set to 45%. Further, the third big hit generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 2933c, that is, the probability variation state and the special big hit to which the conditional short time gaming state is given is set to 11%, and the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 2933d. Is set to 11%, and the fifth big hit generated by the fifth advantageous gaming state control means 2933e is set to 11%. That is, the special jackpot to which the probability variation state and the conditional short-time game state are given is set to 11%.

On the other hand, in the lottery result of the second win / fail determination means 2930a, the first advantageous gaming state control means 293
The first jackpot generated by 3a is set to 44% of the entire jackpot, and the second jackpot generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 2933b is set to 56%. The second hit / fail determining means 2930b is set so as not to generate a special big hit, that is, the third big hit, the fourth big hit and the fifth big hit. For this reason, it is possible to reliably prevent the probability fluctuation state from being terminated without giving a specific profit, and to suppress a significant decrease in gaming motivation due to sudden demotion. In addition, the ratio of the first big hit to the fifth big hit, which is the first big hit or the second big hit that gives a specific profit, is higher in the second winning / decision determining means 2930b. In the jackpot lottery by the first winning / decision determining means 2930a, it is possible to limit the occurrence of jackpots to which a specific profit is given to some extent while the opening / closing prize winning device 1404 is opened relatively frequently. On the other hand, in the big hit lottery by the second winning / decision determining means 2930b that is substantially effective in the short-time gaming state, there is a high possibility that a specific profit will be given. However, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control board 2094 has a normal lottery (second start port 1).
As a configuration relating to a lottery for increasing the ease of winning 421, a normal hit determination random number extraction means 2924, a normal hit determination table 2926, and a normal win / fail determination means 2925 are provided. Random number extracting means 2924 for determining normal hits is a ball entry state detecting means 2990 (
When a ball entering the passing gate 1405 is detected by the gate sensor), a random number for determining the normal hit is extracted from a random counter (random number generating means). The normal hit determination table 2926 is divided into a high probability table and a normal probability table. In the high probability normal hit determination table, 251 normal hit determination random numbers from 0 to 250 are stored. Of these, 250 judgment values for normal hit are set, and the probability of normal hit is 250/251.
It has become. On the other hand, in the normal normal hit determination table, one of the determination values for normal hit is set out of 251 normal hit determination random numbers from 0 to 250, and the probability of normal hit is 1/251. ing. In the normal lottery at high probability, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 13.56 seconds, the opening time of the movable piece 1427 by the start port solenoid 2352 is 1180 ms, the number of times of opening is 3, and the interval between opening is It is set to 512 ms.
On the other hand, in the normal lottery at the normal time, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 13.6 seconds on average, the opening time of the movable piece 1427 is set to 180 ms, and the number of times of opening is set once.

Also, when the normal hit determination random number extraction unit 2924 extracts the normal hit determination random number 2924, the normal hit determination unit 2925 extracts the random number and the normal hit determination table 2926.
Is compared with the normal hit judgment value stored in the table, and if they match, it is determined that the hit is normal. At this time, the gaming state determination means 2923 determines whether or not the gaming state is a specific gaming state, that is, a short-time gaming state. If not, the normal table is selected. For this reason, even in the case of the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 2933a, when the short-time gaming state is completed for a certain number of times, the table at the high probability is switched to the normal table.

When the normal lottery determination unit 2925 determines whether or not the normal lottery is determined on the main control board 2094, the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 2928 in a variable manner and the change time (about 14 seconds or about 1 second). After the elapse of normal symbol variation control means 29 for displaying the result of the success / failure
27 is provided. Further, when the normal hit determination unit 2925 determines that the normal hit is determined, after the normal symbol fluctuation is stopped, the movable piece 1427 is opened, and the opening control unit 2929 that makes it easy to win the game ball in the second start port 1421. Is provided.

As shown in FIG. 114, when the control information command transmitted from the main control board 2094 is received by the command receiving means 2951, the peripheral board 2811 has various functions for controlling the liquid crystal display device 640 on the basis thereof. Is provided.

That is, as a table for effects corresponding to the first big hit lottery, a first hit effect mode table 2952a and a first off-time effect mode table 2953a are stored in advance, and based on these tables 2952a and 2953a, The production mode in the step production and the development production is determined.

First, the production mode tables 2952a and 2953a will be described in detail. The first hit effect mode table 2952a is used in the case of a big hit (or small hit), and shows the relationship between a random number for determining an effect (described later) and an effect mode (in this case, an effect pattern in a step effect or an extended effect). It is shown. The first off-time effect mode table 2953a is a table used in the case of a loss, and shows the relationship between the effect determination random number and the effect pattern.

Peripheral board 2881 is provided with first effect random number extraction means 2957a for extracting effect determination random numbers from a random counter (not shown) and first effect mode determination means 2958a for determining effect patterns. Upon receiving the control command via the command receiving means 2951, the first effect mode determining means 2958a extracts the effect random number by the first effect random number extracting means 2957a and the success / failure command included in the control command is a big hit (or In the case of indicating a small hit), an effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extraction means 2957a and the effect effect table 2952a at the time of first hit, while the success / failure command is determined. In the case of indicating a detachment, the first effect random number extraction means 29
The effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by 57a and the first off-time effect mode table 2953a.

The effect pattern determined by the first effect mode determining means 2958a is extracted from the effect pattern storage means (not shown) and sent to the first effect display control means 2975a. The first effect display control means 2975a reads out the images of those effects from the image storage means (not shown) and derives them to the liquid crystal display device 640.

On the other hand, as a functional configuration related to the production of the first decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol variation control means 2
976a is provided. Based on the control command received by the command receiving unit 2951, the first decorative symbol variation control unit 2976a reads and varies the stop symbol from the first decorative symbol storage unit (not shown), and includes the variation included in the control command. The decorative design is stopped based on the time, the success / failure command, etc. (that is, the lottery result).

In the above description, the effects related to the first big hit lottery have been described.
Is also provided with a functional configuration for producing effects related to the second big hit lottery. Specifically, as the effect table corresponding to the second big hit lottery, the second hit time effect mode table 29
52b and a second off-time effect mode table 2953b are stored in advance, and based on these tables 2952b and 2953b, an effect mode in step effects and development effects is determined. The production mode tables 2952b and 2953b have the same configuration as the production mode tables 2952a and 2953a corresponding to the first big hit lottery, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.

The peripheral board 2881 has a second effect random number extracting means 2 corresponding to the second big hit lottery.
957b, second effect mode determining means 2958b, second effect display control means 2975b, and second decorative symbol variation control means 2976b are provided, and these configurations are also similar to the functional configuration corresponding to the first big hit lottery. The detailed description will be omitted.

Further, the peripheral board 2881 has decorative symbol sequence fluctuation display means 2960 and jackpot display means 2.
964 is provided. The decorative symbol sequence fluctuation display means 2960 is based on the outputs of the first decorative symbol fluctuation control means 2976a and the second decorative symbol fluctuation control means 2976b or based on the control command received by the command receiving means 2951. While changing a row | line | column, based on the fluctuation | variation time contained in the control command, a success / failure command, etc. (namely, lottery result), a common decoration symbol row | line | column is stopped in order. In particular, a combination of decorative symbols (stopped symbols) that have already stopped on the active line at the stage before the last stopped symbol sequence that is stopped last among a plurality of common decorative symbol sequences is a specific decorative symbol When the above combination is satisfied, the reach state is established by using the already stopped decorative symbol as the reach formation symbol.

The jackpot display means 2964 performs the lottery when the lottery result of the first jackpot lottery or the second jackpot lottery is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, that is, when the “probable big hit” or “normal jackpot”. After stopping the variation of the common decorative design sequence, it is displayed that “big hit”. In addition, when the lottery result of the first big hit lottery or the second big hit lottery is the third big hit, the fourth big hit, or the fifth big hit, it is not displayed as “winning”, and the common decorative design column After the change is stopped, the effect related to the lottery is finished.

<Operation of distribution production device>
Subsequently, the operation of the distribution effect device 1444 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90, 116, and 117.
Based on the above description. FIG. 116 is a block diagram illustrating a control configuration in the distribution effect device 1444, and FIG. 117 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration when a table is used in the control in the distribution effect device 1444.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 90, the distribution effector 1444 is provided with the three inflow ports 1480. These inflow ports 1480 are the latent expectation large region and the latent expectation small region, respectively. It is to be assigned. Here, the latent expectation large region is a region that suggests that the probability variation state is likely to be latent, and the latent expectation small region is
This is an area that suggests that the probability variation state is unlikely to be hidden. As shown in FIG. 116, the distribution effect device 1444 includes a lottery result recognition unit 3001 and a region selection unit 3010 as functional configurations. The lottery result recognizing means 3001 is the first winning / failing determining means 2
When the lottery result by the 930a or the second winning / decision determining means 2930b becomes the first result or the second result to determine whether or not a specific profit is given, and if a specific profit is further given, the probability It is determined whether or not it is a big hit that gives a fluctuating state, that is, whether or not the probability change big hit based on the first result or the normal big hit based on the second result. Region selection means 3010
Is to determine an area into which a game ball is sent based on the determination result of the lottery result recognition means 3001 when performing an effect.

More specifically, the area selection means 3010 determines the ratio of the latent expectation large area to be selected when the lottery result by the first success / failure determination means 2930a or the second success / failure determination means 2930b is the first result. On the other hand, the first hit / fail decision means 2
When the lottery result by 930a or the second success / failure determination unit 2930b is the second result, the rate at which the latent expectation small region is selected is set higher than the rate at which the latent expectation large region is selected. For this reason, if a probability variation jackpot has occurred (if the probability variation state is latent),
The rolling direction of the game ball is switched to the latent expectation large area side, and the possibility that the game ball reaches the latent expectation large area becomes high. On the other hand, when a big hit usually occurs (when the probability variation state is not latent), the rolling direction of the game ball can be switched to the latent expectation small area side and the game ball can reach the latent expectation small area Increases nature. Therefore, the probability variation state is latent by recognizing whether the inlet 1480 that the game ball has reached is the inlet 1480 corresponding to the large latent expectation region or the inlet 1480 corresponding to the small latent expectation region. It is possible to grasp the possibility (expectation). As a result, attention can be paid to the behavior of the game ball, and the visual interest can be enhanced by the effect using the game ball.

In addition, the region selecting unit 3010 determines an inflow port assigned as a large expected latent region from among the plurality of inflow ports 1480. In other words, before starting the production, each inlet 1480
A lottery is performed for allocating to a large latent expectation area and a small latent expectation area. This makes it possible to change the position of the latent expectation large region every time, and to make the rolling direction of the game ball rich in changes. That is, it is possible to eliminate distrust due to reaching only the same inlet 1480.

Particularly, the area selecting means 3010 is provided with a number determining means 3011, and the number of inflow ports 1480 to be assigned as the latent expectation large area is determined based on the lottery. For this reason, when the number of inflow ports 1480 assigned as the latent expectation large region is large, it is felt that the possibility of reaching the latent expectation large region has increased, while the number of inflow ports assigned as the latent expectation small region. If there are many, it can be felt that the possibility of reaching the large latent expectation area has decreased, and as a result, the production can be sharpened.

In addition, the distribution effect device 1444 is provided with a notification unit 3017, which is assigned when the region selection unit 3010 assigns each inflow port 1480 to the latent expectation large region and the latent expectation small region. The player is notified of the information on the information, that is, which inflow port 1480 is set as the latent expectation large area. Specifically, the notification means 3017 controls the first light emitting substrate 1500 to light up the light emitting diodes 1503 arranged around the inflow port 1480 assigned to the latent expectation large area in red, while in the latent expectation small area. The light emitting diodes 1503 arranged around the assigned inlet 1480 are lit in blue. For this reason, it is possible to easily identify the large latent expectation region and the small latent expectation region based on the emission color.

The distribution effect device 1444 also includes a drive pattern storage unit 3003 that stores a plurality of drive patterns in advance as the operation mode of the guide member 1490, and one drive pattern from the drive pattern storage unit 3003 prior to the start of the operation. Drive pattern determining means 3002 determined based on the lottery and operation control means 3008 for operating the sorting motor 1493 according to the drive pattern determined by the drive pattern determining means 3002 are further provided. Therefore, not only the behavior of the game ball but also the movement of the guide member 1490 can be varied, and the visual interest can be further enhanced.

The drive pattern will be described in detail. The drive pattern storage unit 3003 includes at least four drive patterns, that is, a continuous operation pattern 3004 and a frame advance pattern 300.
5, a movable range restriction pattern 3006 and a fixed pattern 3007 are stored. When the continuous operation pattern 3004 is selected, the guide member 1490 is rotated like a pendulum at a substantially constant speed, and the tip of the guide member 1490 is sequentially opposed to the respective inflow ports 1480. On the other hand, when the frame advance pattern 3005 is selected, the guide member 1
490 is operated intermittently, and every time the leading end of the guide member 1490 faces each inflow port 1480, an operation of temporarily stopping is performed. For this reason, even when the timing at which the stopped state of the game ball is released is the same and the position of the guide member 1490 at the time of release is the same, different inflow ports 1480 may be reached. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the whereabouts of the game ball while associating the drive pattern of the guide member 1490 and the timing at which the game ball is released.

When the movable range restriction pattern 3006 is selected, two inlets including an inlet selected from among the three inlets 1480 are specified, and the guide member 1490 is moved to the two specified inlets. The operation of rotating so as to oppose only to is performed. For this reason, even when the number of inflow ports allocated as the large latent expectation region is smaller than the number of inflow ports allocated as the small latent expectation region, for example, the movable range of the guide member 1490 is two flow regions. When restricted between entrances (expected latent area and small expected latent area), it is possible to make the game ball feel more likely to reach the large expected latent area, increasing the game motivation. It becomes possible.

When the fixed pattern 3007 is selected, the leading end of the guide member 1490 is fixed in a state of facing the latent expectation large region. For this reason, when this fixed pattern 3007 is reached, it is almost determined that the game ball reaches the latent expectation large area, and the expectation for the occurrence of the probability variation state is surely increased, and the player has a sense of superiority. Can be given.

The area selection unit 3010 including the number determination unit 3011 and the drive pattern determination unit 3002 determine all the distribution conditions based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result recognition unit 3001 and one random number. It is also possible. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117, a distribution random number extraction means 3020 for extracting distribution random numbers for determining control in the distribution effect device 1444, a first distribution operation variable table 3022, and the like. The second distribution operation variable table 3023 and the distribution condition determination means 3021 may be provided. The first distribution operation variable table 3022 is used when the lottery result by the first success / failure determination unit 2930a or the second success / failure determination unit 2930b is the first result, and is used as a latent expectation large region from among the plurality of inflow ports 1480. The distribution conditions including the position of the inflow port 1480 to be assigned, the position of the inflow port 1480 to which the game ball is sent, and the drive pattern which is the operation mode of the guide member 1490, and the distribution extracted by the random number extraction means 3020 for distribution This shows the relationship with the random number. In addition, the second distribution operation variable table 3023 includes the first win / fail determination unit 2930a or the second win / fail determination unit 2.
This is used when the lottery result by 930b is the second result, and shows the relationship between the distribution condition similar to the above and the distribution random number extracted by the distribution random number extraction means 3020.

Then, the distribution condition determining unit 3021 extracts the distribution random number from the distribution random number and the first distribution operation variable table 3022 when the random number for distribution is extracted and the lottery result is the first result. 1
On the other hand, if the sorting condition is determined at 444 and the random number for sorting is extracted and the lottery result is the second result, the sorting condition is determined from the sorting random number and the second sorting operation variable table 3023. To decide.

[Operation ring unit]
Next, regarding the operation ring unit 329 (movable body) constituting the main part of the present invention, FIG.
This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 118 is a perspective view showing the operation ring unit 329. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation ring unit 329. FIG.
20 (A) is a top view showing the operation ring unit 329, and FIG. 120 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 121A is a top view showing the operation ring unit 329, and FIG. 121B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. FIG.
FIG. 5 is a rear perspective view showing a ring cap 341 and a ring gear 342. FIG. 123 (A
) Is a perspective view from the left side showing the ring gear 342 and the LED / switch board 353, and FIG. 123 (B) is a perspective view from the right side showing the ring gear 342 and the LED / switch board 353. is there. FIG. 124 is a perspective view showing a state where the LED / switch board 353 is attached to the unit base 354. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the shielding plate 351 of the ring gear 342 and the photoswitches 360a and 360b as the ring cap 341 rotates in the clockwise direction. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the shielding plate 351 of the ring gear 342 and the photoswitches 360a and 360b as the ring cap 341 rotates counterclockwise. FIG. 127A is a list showing ON / OFF of the photoswitches 360a and 360b accompanying the clockwise rotation of the ring cap 341. FIG.
) Is a photoswitch 360a, 360 associated with the counterclockwise rotation of the ring cap 341.
It is a list figure which shows ON / OFF of b.

As shown in FIG. 118, the operation ring unit 329 includes a button mechanism 3 that can be pressed.
30 and a ring mechanism 331 capable of rotating operation, the upper and lower cover bodies 33 forming an outer casing.
2, 333 is configured as a unit. The button mechanism 330 is shown in FIG.
19, a button cap 334 formed in a cylindrical shape having an upper surface wall serving as a pressing operation portion and formed of a light-transmitting material, and a disk-shaped light accommodated in the button cap 334 A diffusion lens 335, and a cylindrical plunger 336 to which the light diffusion lens 335 and the button cap 334 are attached to the upper end portion are provided.

On the outer peripheral surface on the upper end side of the plunger 336, there is a flange-shaped flange portion 337 that regulates the mounting position of the button cap 334 while holding the light diffusion lens 335 by contacting the lower end portion of the cylinder of the button cap 334. Projecting over the circumference, the flange-shaped flange portion 33
7 is engaged with an engagement protrusion (not shown) provided on the cylindrical inner wall portion of the button cap 334, thereby engaging and fixing the button cap 334 on the outer peripheral surface of the plunger 336. (Not shown) is drilled.

120 and 121, the inner wall portion of the plunger 336 is formed as a bowl-shaped communication port having a diameter reduced downward, and the plunger 336 is formed at the lower end of the outer peripheral surface.
The engaging claw 33 is attached to a unit base 354 to be slidable in the vertical direction.
8 are formed in two places. A return spring 339 is wound around the outer peripheral surface of the plunger 336 so as to push back the upper surface wall of the pressed button cap 334. The upper end portion of the return spring 339 is a flange-shaped flange portion 33.
7 is restricted from moving upward while being placed in contact with the lower surface of the base plate 7, while the lower end portion is placed in contact with a support projection 369 formed on the unit base 354 so that downward movement is prevented. The plunger 336 is constantly biased upward. A detection protrusion 3 for detecting a pressing operation of the button cap 334 is provided at the lower end portion of the plunger 336.
36a protrudes.

The ring mechanism 331 includes a ring cap 341 (movable body, ring member) formed in a cylindrical shape having an upper surface wall and made of a translucent material, and a ring gear attached integrally to the ring cap 341. 342, a transmission gear 343 provided in mesh with the ring gear 342, and a stepping motor 344 (electric drive source, motor) to which the transmission gear 343 is integrally attached to the motor shaft 344a. .

A circular insertion hole 345 for inserting the button cap 334 is formed in the upper surface wall of the ring cap 341, and the lower end portion of the side wall of the ring cap 341 has
The upper cover body 3 with the ring cap 341 assembled as the operation ring unit 329
A flange-shaped flange portion 346 that restricts the upward movement of the ring cap 341 that is inserted from an insertion hole 371 that will be described later is provided projecting over the entire circumference. Further, as shown in FIG. 122, a cylindrical mounting cylindrical portion 347 is erected on the back surface side of the ring cap 341 which is an outer peripheral end of the insertion hole 345, and the mounting cylindrical portion 347 includes a ring gear. An engagement hole 348 for fitting the 342 by fitting is formed. A gear portion 349 that meshes with the transmission gear 343 is formed at the outer peripheral end of the ring gear 342, and an inner wall portion above the gear portion 349 has
As shown in FIG. 123, an engagement protrusion 350 that engages with an engagement hole 348 provided in the ring cap 341 is provided. On the other hand, below the gear portion 349, a plurality of shielding plates 351 are erected over the entire circumference with a predetermined interval (hereinafter also referred to as a slit).

The operation ring unit 329 is an LED for decorating the ring cap 341.
LED for light-decorating the board 352 and the button cap 334, detecting the pressing operation of the button cap 334, and detecting the rotation direction and rotation speed of the ring cap 341
A switch substrate 353 and a unit base 354 serving as a mounting base for various components constituting the operation ring unit 329 are provided.

An insertion hole 355 for inserting the mounting cylindrical portion 347 of the ring cap 341 is formed in the center portion of the LED substrate 352, and an upper surface portion serving as an outer peripheral end of the insertion hole 355
Four full-color LEDs 356 (light emitting means) are mounted at predetermined intervals. Also,
At the four corners of the LED board 352, mounting holes 357 for fixing the LED board 352 to the upper part of the unit base 354 with screws are formed. And LED board 3
52, the mounting cylindrical portion 347 of the ring cap 341 is inserted into the insertion hole 355, and in this state, the ring gear 342 is externally fitted to the mounting cylindrical portion 347, so that the ring cap 341 and the ring gear 342 are attached. Is provided. Also, in this attached state,
Four full-color LEDs 356 on the LED substrate 352 are respectively connected to a ring cap 341.
The light-transmitting ring cap 341 is light-decorated from the inside by being housed inside and emitting light in various colors. Further, the LED substrate 352 is screwed to the unit base 354 through the mounting hole 357, so that the ring cap 341 integrally attached with the ring gear 342 is rotatably attached to the unit base 354. ing.

On the upper surface portion of the LED / switch board 353, the full color LED 358 for illuminating the button cap 334, the photo switch 359 for detecting the pressing operation of the button cap 334, and the rotational direction and rotational speed of the ring cap 341 are displayed. Two photoswitches 360a and 360b (operation detection means) for detection are mounted. L
The LED / switch board 353 is connected to the unit base 354 on the ED / switch board 353.
A mounting hole 361 for fixing with a screw is formed in the lower portion of the housing.

As shown in FIG. 124, the unit base 354 includes a cylindrical base portion 362 formed in a cylindrical shape having a bottom (hereinafter referred to as a bottom wall 362a), and a circle formed in the bottom wall 362a of the cylindrical base portion 362. A cylindrical mounting cylindrical portion 363 erected upward from the opening end of the shape. On the outer peripheral wall surface of the cylindrical base 362, the unit base 354 and the LED substrate 352 to which the ring cap 341 and the ring gear 342 are rotatably attached are both provided in the lower cover body 3.
Mounting bosses 364 for screwing to 33 are provided at four locations, and the unit base 3
54 is provided with a mounting piece 365 for mounting the stepping motor 344.

The ring cap 341 and the ring gear 342 attached to the unit base 354 via the LED substrate 352 are attached to the unit base 354 in a state where the mounting cylindrical part 347 and the gear inner peripheral surface are fitted in the mounting cylindrical part 363, respectively. As a result, the unit base 354 is pivotably attached. In this attached state, the ring gear 34
2 is disposed in the internal space between the cylindrical base 362 and the mounting cylindrical portion 363.

Further, the stepping motor 344 is screwed to the lower surface of the attachment piece portion 365, and the motor shaft 344 is attached to the attachment piece portion 365 with the stepping motor 344 attached.
An insertion hole 365a that penetrates a upward is formed. The transmission gear 343 has a mounting piece 36.
5 is attached to the motor shaft 344a inserted through the insertion hole 365a on the upper surface side, and the attachment piece 36
A notch portion 365b for engaging the transmission gear 343 and the ring gear 342 is formed in the wall surface portion of the cylindrical base portion 362 serving as the base portion of the fifth portion. Then, the stepping motor 344 rotates the ring gear 342 via the transmission gear 343, thereby causing the ring gear 34 to rotate.
The ring cap 341 provided integrally with the rotary 2 is driven to rotate. That is,
The ring cap 341 constituting the ring mechanism 331 has the function of an operating means that can be operated by the player, similarly to the button cap 334 constituting the button mechanism 330, and is a movable effect that rotates based on the driving of the stepping motor 344. It also has a function as a means.

The mounting cylindrical portion 363 has a bottom wall 366 having a circular LED opening 366a that exposes the full color LED 358 on the LED / switch board 353 upward in a state where the LED / switch board 353 is attached to the lower portion of the unit base 354. It has. The bottom wall 366 includes
The two engaging claws 338 of the plunger 336 and the two engaging recesses 36 corresponding to the plunger 336 respectively.
7 and a switch opening 3 exposing the photoswitch 359 on the LED / switch board 353 upward with the LED / switch board 353 attached to the lower part of the unit base 354.
68 and a support projection 369 for supporting the lower end portion of the return spring 339. In addition, two switch openings 370a and 370b are formed from the side wall on the lower end side of the mounting cylindrical portion 363 to the bottom wall 362a of the cylindrical base portion 362, and the LED / switch board 3 is formed.
53 is attached to the lower part of the unit base 354, the switch opening 370a has
A photoswitch 360a on the LED / switch board 353 is provided on the LED / switch board 353, and a photoswitch 360b on the LED / switch board 353 is provided on the switch opening 370b.

The plunger 336 slidably attached to the unit base 354 in the up / down direction by engaging the engaging claw 338 with the engaging recess 367 in a state where the outer peripheral wall surface is fitted in the mounting cylindrical portion 363. By being attached to the unit base 354, sliding movement in the vertical direction is guided. In addition, LED switch board 353
The upper full-color LED 358 is provided so as to communicate with the light diffusion lens 335 attached to the upper end of the plunger 336 through the LED opening 366a of the unit base 354 and the bowl-shaped communication port of the plunger 336. The translucent button cap 334 is light-decorated from the inside by emitting light.

In addition, the photo switch 359 provided adjacent to the switch opening 368 includes a plunger 336.
The button cap 334 is disposed at a position corresponding to the detection protrusion 336 a provided at the lower end of the button cap 334.
By detecting the detection protrusion 336a that descends with the pressing operation of the button cap 3,
34 is detected to be pressed. Also, each switch opening 370a
, 370b are arranged at positions corresponding to the shielding plate 351 provided at the lower end of the ring gear 342, and the rotation direction of the ring cap 341 is detected by detecting the presence or absence of the shielding plate 351. In addition, the rotation speed is detected. The photo switches 360a and 360b detect the rotational direction and rotational speed of the ring cap 341, thereby detecting whether or not the ring cap 341 is rotated, and the ring cap 341 functions as a movable effect unit. At this time, the rotation operation of the ring cap 341 is controlled. The detection of the rotational direction and rotational speed of the ring cap 341 by the photoswitches 360a and 360b will be described in detail later.

The upper and lower cover bodies 332 and 333 forming the outer casing of the operation ring unit 329 are each formed in a diamond shape with rounded corners. The upper cover body 332 includes a housing having a lower surface opening, and a circular insertion hole 371 through which the ring cap 341 is inserted is formed in the upper surface wall. In addition, mounting bosses 373 for mounting and fixing the lower cover body 333 with screws 372 are provided at lower portions at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the upper cover body 332 (see FIG. 120B).

On the other hand, the lower cover body 333 is composed of a housing having an upper surface opening, and the lower surface wall has electric parts (stepping motor 344, LED) of the operation ring unit 329 accommodated in the upper and lower cover bodies 332, 333. An insertion hole 374 for inserting a wiring (not shown) connected to the board 352 and the LED / switch board 353 is formed. The lower cover body 3
Four mounting holes 3 are provided on the lower surface wall of 33 for mounting the LED board 352 and the unit base 354 together with the four mounting bosses 364 of the unit base 354.
75 and the stepping motor 34 screwed to the mounting piece 365 of the unit base 354
A positioning recess 376 for positioning and fixing the lower end of 4 is formed. Further, two attachment bosses 377 of the upper cover body 332 and two attachment holes 377 respectively corresponding to the lower cover body 333 in the longitudinal direction are formed.

Thus, the plunger 336 with the button cap 334 and the light diffusion lens 335 attached to the upper part of the unit base 354 serving as the mounting base for the operation ring unit 329 is vertically moved with the urging force of the return spring 339 being received. A ring cap 341 integrally attached with a ring gear 342 is rotatably attached via the LED substrate 352. On the other hand, in the lower part of the unit base 354,
A stepping motor 344 in which a transmission gear 343 that meshes with the ring gear 342 is integrally attached to the motor shaft 344a, and an LED / switch board 353 are attached. And
A unit to which various components are attached in a state where a button cap 334 serving as a pressing operation portion of the button mechanism 330 and a ring cap 341 serving as a rotation operation portion of the ring mechanism 331 are inserted from the insertion holes 371 of the upper cover body 332. The base body 354 has upper and lower cover bodies 332.
The operation ring unit 329 is configured by being accommodated between 333.

Next, detection of the rotational direction and rotational speed of the ring cap 341 by the photoswitches 360a and 360b will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127. FIG. Note that the photoswitches 360a and 360b are ring gears 342 that rotate integrally with the ring cap 341.
By detecting the shielding plate 351, the rotational direction and rotational speed of the ring cap 341 are detected. In FIGS. 125 to 127, the photo switch 360a is described as “A” and the photo switch 360b is described as “B”. Steps 1 to 4 shown below are four types of rotation positions of the ring cap 341 with respect to the photo switches 360a and 360b, respectively. Steps 1, 2, and 2 are performed when the ring cap 341 rotates. The rotational position sequentially shifts to step 3 and step 4, and after shifting to step 4, it returns to step 1 again.

First, when the ring cap 341 rotates in the clockwise direction, as shown in FIG. 125, as shown in FIG. 125, both the photoswitches 360 a and 360 b detect the shielding plate 351 of the ring gear 342 and then the ring cap 341. The photoswitch 360a detects the shielding plate 351 by the shift to step 2 accompanying the clockwise rotation, while the ring gear 34
The second slit moves to the photo switch 360b, and the photo switch 360b is moved to the shielding plate 35.
The process proceeds to a step where 1 is not detected. Thereafter, due to the shift to step 3 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the ring cap 341, the slit of the ring gear 342 is moved to each photoswitch 36.
It moves to 0a, 360b, and shifts to a step where neither the photoswitch 360a, 360b detects the shielding plate 351. Then, due to the shift to step 4 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the ring cap 341, the slit of the ring gear 342 moves to the photo switch 360a, and the photo switch 360a does not detect the shielding plate 351, while the photo switch 360b.
Shifts to the step of detecting the shielding plate 351.

On the other hand, when the ring cap 341 rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG.
As Step 1, both the photo switches 360a and 360b detect the shielding plate 351 of the ring gear 342, and then the transition to Step 2 accompanying the rotation of the ring cap 341 in the counterclockwise direction causes the slit of the ring gear 342 to be opened. The process proceeds to the step of moving to the photo switch 360a and the photo switch 360a does not detect the shielding plate 351, while the photo switch 360b detects the shielding plate 351. Thereafter, due to the shift to Step 3 accompanying the rotation of the ring cap 341 in the counterclockwise direction, the slit of the ring gear 342 moves to the respective photoswitches 360a and 360b, and the photoswitches 360a and 360b are both shielded by the shielding plate 351.
Move to the step that does not detect. Then, due to the shift to step 4 accompanying the rotation of the ring cap 341 in the counterclockwise direction, the photoswitch 360a detects the shielding plate 351, while the slit of the ring gear 342 moves to the photoswitch 360b and the photoswitch 3
The process moves to the step in which 60b does not detect the shielding plate 351.

That is, the photo switches 360a, 3 when the ring cap 341 rotates clockwise.
60b ON (with shielding plate 351 detected) / OFF (without shielding plate 351 detected) operation is
As shown in FIG. 127 (A), in step 1, the photoswitches 360a and 360b are both “
In step 2, the photo switch 360a continues to be “ON”, while the photo switch 360b is “OFF”. Thereafter, in step 3, the photoswitch 360a,
After both of 360b are turned “OFF”, the photo switch 360a is turned “OFF” in step 4.
While "F" is continued, the photo switch 360b is turned "ON". Thereafter, the process returns to step 1 again, and both the photo switches 360a and 360b are turned on. On the other hand, when the ring cap 341 rotates counterclockwise, the photo switches 360a and 360b are turned on.
As shown in FIG. 127 (B), the / OFF operation is performed in step 1 by the photoswitch 360a,
360b is both “ON”, and in step 2, the photoswitch 360b continues to be “ON”, while the photoswitch 360a is “OFF”. Thereafter, after both the photo switches 360a and 360b are turned “OFF” in step 3, the photo switch 360b continues to be “OFF” in step 4, while the photo switch 360a is turned “ON”. Thereafter, the process returns to step 1 again, and both the photo switches 360a and 360b are turned on.

Accordingly, the photo switches 360a and 360b are configured to detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the ring cap 341 based on the ON / OFF in each of the steps 1 to 4 as described above. When the ring cap 341 constituting the ring mechanism 331 functions as an operation means, in other words, when the ring cap 341 is rotated by a player's operation, the photoswitches 360a and 360b are turned on / off. By detecting the switching, it is detected that the ring cap 341 has been rotated. At this time, the ring cap 341 is determined from the ON / OFF state of the photoswitches 360a and 360b before the rotating operation and the ON / OFF state of the photoswitches 360a and 360b during the rotating operation.
Is detected to be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. In the embodiment, the photo switches 360a and 360b
The rotation direction and the rotation speed of the ring cap 341 are detected by using the ring cap 341. By counting the pulses of the photo switches 360a and 360b, the ring cap 341 is detected.
It is also possible to detect the rotational position.

For example, in the case where Step 1, that is, the state where both the photo switches 360 a and 360 b are “ON”, is the state before the rotation operation, the photo switches 360 a and 360 b during the rotation operation are turned on.
In the / OFF state, the photo switch 360a is “ON”, while the photo switch 36
If 0b is “OFF”, it coincides with step 2 in the clockwise direction, so that it is detected that the ring cap 341 has been rotated in the clockwise direction. On the other hand, if the photoswitch 360a is “OFF” as the ON / OFF state of the photoswitches 360a and 360b during the rotation operation, the photoswitch 360b is “ON”, which corresponds to Step 2 in the counterclockwise direction. , It is detected that the ring cap 341 has been rotated counterclockwise. The clockwise or counterclockwise operation signal of the ring cap 341 detected by the photoswitches 360a and 360b is output to the peripheral control board 2830. Then, the peripheral control board 2830 (effect control means, motion detection effect control means, symbol display control means) receives the player's intention to operate based on the input operation signal, and this is used as an effect on the liquid crystal display device 640 or the like. It is to reflect.

Further, when the ring cap 341 functions as a movable effect means that rotates based on the driving of the stepping motor 344, the driving of the stepping motor 344 is transmitted as the rotating operation of the ring gear 342 via the transmission gear 343, and this ring gear. The ring cap 341 provided integrally by the rotation operation of 342 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise.
At this time, the photoswitches 360a and 360b detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the ring cap 341 depending on whether or not the shielding plate 351 of the ring gear 342 rotating together with the ring cap 341 is detected (ON / OFF). The photo switches 360a and 36
A detection signal based on 0b is output to the peripheral control board 2830, and the peripheral control board 28 having received the detection signal.
30 (notice operation control means) controls the rotation operation of the ring cap 341 in a state where the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the ring cap 341 are grasped.

Next, the function as the operation means by the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 of the operation ring unit 329 and the function as the movable effect means will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 136. 128 (A) to 128 (F) show the button mechanism 3 of the operation ring unit 329.
30 and FIG. 129 are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 (production unit) when the ring mechanism 331 functions as an operation unit, and FIGS. 129A to 129E illustrate buttons of the operation ring unit 329. FIGS. 130A to 130F are diagrams illustrating an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 when the mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 function as operation means, and FIGS. 130A to 130F substitute the selection operation by the ring mechanism 331. Liquid crystal display device 640 when determining whether or not
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a selection operation detection process by the effect control process, and FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing a modification example 1 of the selection operation detection process in the effect control process. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing Modification Example 2 of the selection operation detection process in the effect control process, and FIGS. 134A to 134D show a button mechanism 330 and a ring mechanism 331 that function as movable effect means, and Corresponding liquid crystal display device 640
135 (A) to 135 (C) are an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display screen of FIG. 135, and FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 (C) show a button mechanism 330 and a ring mechanism 331 that function as movable effecting means, and a liquid crystal display device 64 corresponding thereto.
FIGS. 136A to 136C are an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display screen of 0, and FIGS. 136A to 136C are a button mechanism 330 and a ring mechanism 331 that function as movable effecting means, and a liquid crystal display device 6 corresponding thereto.
It is explanatory drawing which shows an example with 40 display screens.

First, two examples in which the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 function as operating means will be described. As a first example, a decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 (production unit, symbol display unit) based on a jackpot determination associated with winning at the starting port (first starting port 1420, second starting port 1421). (Symbol), as shown in FIG. 128 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 401,
403 is displayed with the same symbol and the reach form is displayed (in the same figure, the case where the left and right decorative symbols are aligned with “7” is illustrated), and then, as the middle decorative symbol 402 continues to change, FIG. 128 (B ), The left and right decorative symbols 401 and 403 move to the left and right upper ends of the display screen, respectively, and are reduced and displayed to develop from normal reach fluctuation to super reach fluctuation. And FIG.
As shown in (C), the left and right decorative symbols 401 and 403 are used as the variation of the super reach.
The middle decoration symbol 402a (in the figure, the “6” middle decoration symbol is illustrated) and the right and left decorative symbols 401 and 403 are the same symbol as the big decoration. A symbol 402b (in the figure, “7” is illustrated as an example of a medium decoration) is displayed side by side, and below that, an image 405a in which the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) rotates counterclockwise.
And “turn the operation ring” characters 406a are displayed, the ring mechanism 33 is displayed.
1 (ring cap 341) is displayed to prompt the player to rotate counterclockwise.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), an effect display is performed in which the medium decorative symbol 402a for determining the loss pushes the medium decorative symbol 402b for determining the big hit. When the player rotates the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) counterclockwise, this is detected by the photoswitches 360a and 360b of the ring mechanism 331 (the detection signal of the ring cap 341 counterclockwise is (Output to the control board 2830), as shown in FIG. 128 (E), an effect display is performed to push back the medium decorative design 402a for determining the big hit the medium decorative design 402b determining the big hit, finally, As shown in FIG. 128 (F), among the medium decorative symbol 402b for determining the big hit and the medium decorative symbol 402a for determining the loss, the medium decorative symbol constituting the display result based on the big hit determination is the other medium decorative symbol. Is completely pushed out, and the display result of the decorative pattern is derived to the liquid crystal display device 640. In FIG. 128 (F), based on the determination result of the jackpot, the middle decoration symbol 402b of “7” completely extrudes the middle decoration symbol 402a of “6”, and the jackpot symbol of “7/7/7” ( The case where the specific display result is derived is illustrated.

As a second example, in the decorative design that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 based on the jackpot determination associated with winning at the start opening (first start opening 1420, second start opening 1421), FIG.
As shown in FIG. 9A, the left and right decorative symbols 401 and 403 are aligned with the same symbol and the reach mode is displayed. Then, as the middle decorative symbol 402 continues to fluctuate, When the decorative symbols 401 and 403 move to the left and right upper ends of the display screen and are reduced and displayed to develop from normal reach fluctuation to super reach fluctuation, an image for selecting the super reach fluctuation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. . The selected image of the variation mode is shown in FIG.
), The option image 404a of the variation mode A (the letter “A” is illustrated in the figure)
And a variation mode B option image 404b (in the figure, the letter “B” is illustrated) are displayed side by side, below which a ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is clockwise and counterclockwise. And a button mechanism 330 (button cap 334) for determining the selection.
Is displayed, and a message 406b of “Please select with the operation ring” is displayed, thereby prompting the player to select a variation mode by rotating the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341). Is done.

Then, the player selects the ring mode 331 (ring cap 341) to select the variation mode A.
When the button mechanism 330 (button cap 334) is pressed by the player for selection selection, this is detected by the photoswitches 360a, 360b of the ring mechanism 331 ( As shown in FIG. 129 (D), the option image 404a of the variation mode A is blinked and displayed, while the detection signal in the clockwise direction of the ring cap 341 is output to the peripheral control board 2830). The option image 404b is turned off, and an image 405a in which the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) rotates clockwise and a character 406c of “OK!” Are displayed below the ring image 3b.
A display for notifying the player that the variation mode A has been selected by the rotation operation of the ring 31 (ring cap 341) is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (E), the effect image 407 of the super reach variation in the variation mode A selected by the player (“A” in FIG.
Is displayed).

That is, the function as the operation means by the ring mechanism 331 of the operation ring unit 329 is as follows.
In accordance with the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 640, the player rotates the ring cap 341, and the rotation operation is reflected in the effect contents to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

By the way, when the ring mechanism 331 functions as a selection operation means that can be selected as an alternative as in the second example described above, the player performs a selection operation by the ring mechanism 331 on the pachinko machine 1 side (
Specifically, it is possible to determine in advance whether or not to substitute automatically by the control of the peripheral control board 2830). The determination as to whether or not to perform the selection operation is performed on the display image for determining the operation substitution of the liquid crystal display device 640 as shown in FIG. The display image for determining the operation substitution is a start port (first start port 1420, during a demonstration display of the liquid crystal display device 640).
When the button mechanism 330 (button cap 334) is pressed in a state where the winning detection at the second starting port 1421) has not been detected for a predetermined time or longer, the liquid crystal display device 640 is displayed.

In the operation substitution determination display image shown in FIG. 130 (A), an option image 408a in which the characters “do not perform selection operation” and an option image 40 in which the characters “perform selection operation” are written.
8b are displayed side by side, and below the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341)
Are rotated alternately in the clockwise and counterclockwise directions, and an image 405b in which the button mechanism 330 (button cap 334) for selection determination is pressed and a letter 406b of “Please select with the operation ring” are displayed. Thus, a display for prompting the player to decide whether or not to perform the selection operation by the rotation operation of the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is performed.

Then, the player plays the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) to perform the selection operation.
) In the counterclockwise direction (at this time, the button mechanism 330 is used for determining the selection).
(The button cap 334 is pressed by the player), this is the ring mechanism 331
As shown in FIG. 130 (B), the photoswitches 360a and 360b detect (the detection signal in the counterclockwise direction of the ring cap 341 is output to the peripheral control board 2830).
While the option image 408b of “substituting the selection operation” is displayed blinking, the option image 408a of “do not perform the selection operation” is turned off, and below that, the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is counterclockwise. The image 405c rotating in the direction and the character "406c" of "OK!"
Is displayed to notify the player that the selection operation has been decided to be performed by the rotation operation of the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341).

Thereafter, it is determined that the selection operation is performed on the display image for determining the operation substitution described above, and when the selection effect image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 as shown in FIG. Selection is automatically performed based on the control of 2830. Specifically, in the selection effect image shown in FIG. 130 (C), the option image 409a of character A and the option image 409b of character B are displayed side by side, and below that is a ring mechanism 331.
The image 405b in which the (ring cap 341) rotates alternately in the clockwise direction and counterclockwise and the button mechanism 330 (button cap 334) for selection determination is pressed, and the characters “Please select with the operation ring” 406b is displayed, and a display prompting the player to select a character is performed by rotating the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341). In addition,
At this time, the character B that is the option image 409b is displayed as a stronger character than the character A that is the option image 409a.
Game content that is more advantageous to the player when selecting 09b) (for example, it is likely to be a big hit)
It gives an impression that can be.

When the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is rotated in the default direction as shown in FIG. 130 (D) by the control of the peripheral control board 2830 (in the figure, the counterclockwise direction is the default). Direction) and the ring mechanism 331 is rotated counterclockwise), the option image 409b of the character B is flashed and displayed while the character A
The option image 409a is turned off, and an image 405c in which the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) rotates counterclockwise and a character “406c” “406!” Are displayed below the ring image 409a. Character B by rotation of 331 (ring cap 341)
A display is made to notify the player that is selected.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 130D, the default direction is set to the counterclockwise direction, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the default direction may be set to the clockwise direction. In this case, the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 34) is controlled under the control of the peripheral control board 2830.
When 1) is rotated clockwise, as shown in FIG. 130 (E), the option image 409a of character A is blinked and the option image 409b of character B is turned off.
Below that, an image 4 in which the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) rotates clockwise.
By displaying 05a and the character 406c of “OK!”, A display for notifying the player that the character A has been selected by the rotation of the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is performed.

Further, the default direction is not limited to either the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction, and a direction corresponding to the type of option displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 may be set as the default direction. Specifically, a direction that can provide a game content advantageous to the player may be set as the default direction. For example, when the selection image 409a of the character A is displayed on the left side and the selection image 409b of the character B is displayed on the right side, as shown in FIG. As in the case of the option image 409
The ring mechanism 331 is rotated counterclockwise to select b. On the other hand, the option image 409b of the character B is displayed on the left side as the selection effect image, and the option image 4 of the character A is displayed.
When 09a is displayed on the right side, the option image 409b is displayed as shown in FIG.
The ring mechanism 331 is rotated in the clockwise direction to select. On the other hand, a direction that may result in a game content that is disadvantageous to the player may be set as the default direction.

Here, regarding the selection operation detection processing of the ring mechanism 331 by the peripheral control board 2830,
This will be described with reference to FIG. This selection operation detection process is a control performed at the time of selection effect of the liquid crystal display device 640 as shown in FIG. In FIG. 131, first, it is determined whether or not an operation proxy flag is set (step S101). The operation proxy flag is a flag that is set when the option image 408b of “substituting the selection operation” is selected and determined in the display image for determination of proxy operation in FIG. If the operation proxy flag is not set in step S101, then the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 34) is set.
It is determined whether or not 1) has been rotated, in other words, whether or not there is a change in the operation detection signal from the photoswitches 360a and 360b (step S102). When there is a change in the operation detection signal, a rotation direction selection flag based on the operation detection signal is set (step S).
103) The selection operation detection process is terminated.

That is, when the ring mechanism 331 is rotated and a change occurs in the operation detection signal, the selection flag in the direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) in which the ring mechanism 331 is rotated is set. The selection flag is a display indicating that the player has selected and decided one of the alternative choices (for example, the display shown in FIG. 129 (D)) or the choice decided and decided in the selection effect of the liquid crystal display device 640. Is a flag for display control of the effect display (for example, the effect display in FIG. 129 (E)).

On the other hand, if there is no rotation operation of the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) and the operation detection signal does not change in step S102, it is determined whether or not a predetermined detection effective time of the ring mechanism 331 has passed (step S104). ). If the operation detection signal is not ON even though the detection valid time has elapsed, a default rotation direction selection flag is set (step S105), and the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is set in the default direction. Is rotated (step S106), and the selection operation detection process is terminated. Here, the default rotation direction (default direction) is a rotation direction of the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) set in advance by the peripheral control board 2830 described above, and is clockwise, counterclockwise, and player It is a direction that can be a game content that is advantageous to the player, or a direction that can be a game content that is disadvantageous to the player.

If the operation proxy flag is set in step S101, the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is rotated in the default direction (step S107). After that, by detecting the change of the operation detection signal by the photo switches 360a and 360b,
A rotation direction selection flag based on the operation detection signal is set (step S108), and the selection operation detection process is terminated. At this time, the process of step S108 includes step S1.
If the player rotates the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) in the anti-default direction immediately after the rotation in the default direction, the selection flag for the default direction rotated in 07 is not set as it is. A selection flag is set. That is, when the proxy operation for the selection effect is determined and when the ring mechanism 331 is not operated in spite of the fact that the proxy operation for the selection effect is not determined, The ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is rotated in the default direction. When the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is rotated in the default direction and the player does not operate, the default direction selection flag is set as it is. On the other hand, when the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is rotated in the default direction and the player operates in the anti-default direction, the stepping motor 344 that rotates the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is driven. Is stopped, the rotation operation of the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) by the player is prioritized, and the selection flag for the anti-default direction is set.

As described above, in this embodiment, the player leaves room for rotating the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) in the anti-default direction. Specifically, the player operates the ring cap 341 in the operating direction (default If the player does not like the direction of rotation, the player can intervene and correct it during the rotation, or can stop the rotation when the ring cap 341 moves unexpectedly (unintentionally for the player). The ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) can be rotated while leaving such a room.

By the way, the selection operation detection process of the ring mechanism 331 is not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 131, and may be the configurations of Modifications 1 and 2 shown below. In the selection operation detection process of the first modification, as shown in FIG. 132, first, it is determined whether or not an operation proxy flag is set (step S111). When the operation proxy flag is not set in step S111, the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is similar to the selection operation detection process of FIG. 131.
Is rotated, and it is determined whether or not there is a change in the operation detection signal from the photoswitches 360a and 360b (step S112). When there is a change in the operation detection signal, a selection flag for the rotation direction based on the operation detection signal is set (step S113), and “1” is added to the operation detection counter that counts that the operation detection signal has changed. (Step S1
14) The selection operation detection process is terminated. That is, when the ring mechanism 331 is rotated and the operation detection signal is changed, a selection flag is set in a direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) in which the ring mechanism 331 is rotated, and further, the ring mechanism 331 is set. It is memorized that has been rotated.

On the other hand, when there is no rotation operation of the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) and the operation detection signal does not change in step S112, it is determined whether or not a predetermined detection effective time of the ring mechanism 331 has passed (step S115). ). If the operation detection signal does not change even though the detection effective time has elapsed, next, in the past ten selection effects, the step S1
It is determined whether or not the value of the operation detection counter counted in 14 is “5” or more (step S116). When the value of the operation detection counter is “5” or more in step S116, in other words, when the player has rotated the ring mechanism 331 five times or more in the past ten selection effects, the ring mechanism 331 is relatively frequently operated. It is determined that the player is rotating, and the process proceeds to step S117 in order to extend the effective detection time of the ring mechanism 331. Step S11
The processing of No. 6 is performed based on the storage in the operation storage area provided in the RAM 2836 of the peripheral control board 2830, and the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) in the selection effect up to the latest 10 times in the operation storage area. The determination process is performed by storing the presence / absence of the operation (). That is, each time a selection effect is performed, the oldest data among the past 10 stored data is deleted, and the ring mechanism 3 by the player in the selection effect is displayed.
The presence / absence of operation of 31 (ring cap 341) is stored as the newest data. For this reason, even when a player who plays a game with the pachinko machine 1 is switched, the player gradually adjusts to the player each time the selection effect is executed (whether or not the player frequently rotates the ring mechanism 331). The process of step S116 can be performed based on the determination criteria.

In step S117, it is determined again whether the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is rotated and the operation detection signals from the photo switches 360a and 360b are changed. When there is a change in the operation detection signal in step S117, the selection flag for the rotation direction based on the operation detection signal is set (step S113) and the operation detection signal has changed as in the transition from step S112. "1" in the operation detection counter that counts
"Is added (step S114), and the selection operation detection process is terminated. On the other hand, step S1
If the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is not rotated and the operation detection signal does not change at step 17, it is determined whether or not the detection effective time (extension effective time) of the extended ring mechanism 331 has passed ( Step S118). If there is no change in the operation detection signal even though the extended effective time has elapsed, a default rotation direction selection flag is set (step S119), and the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is set in the default direction.
Is rotated (step S120), and the selection operation detection process is terminated.

Further, when the operation proxy flag is set in step S111, and in step S111
When the value of the operation detection counter is less than “5” at 116, the ring mechanism 33 is set in the default direction.
1 (ring cap 341) is rotated (step S121). Thereafter, a change in the operation detection signal is detected by the photoswitches 360a and 360b, thereby setting a selection flag for the rotation direction based on the operation detection signal (step S122), and the selection operation detection process is ended. At this time, as a process of step S122, the selection flag of the default direction rotated in step S121 is not set as it is, but the player moves the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341 in the anti-default direction immediately after the rotation in the default direction). ) Is rotated, the selection flag for the anti-default direction is set. That is, the ring mechanism 331 is not rotated even though the selection operation proxy at the time of the selection effect has been determined and the proxy operation of the selection effect has not been determined. When the number of times that the player has rotated the ring mechanism 331 is less than 5 in the selection effect, the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is temporarily rotated in the default direction. When the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is rotated in the default direction and the player does not operate, the default direction selection flag is set as it is. On the other hand, the ring mechanism 3
When 31 (ring cap 341) is rotated in the default direction, if there is an operation in the counter-default direction by the player, the driving of the stepping motor 344 that rotates the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is stopped. Priority is given to the rotation operation of the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) by the player, and the selection flag for the anti-default direction is set.

As described above, in this embodiment, the player leaves room for rotating the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) in the anti-default direction. Specifically, the player operates the ring cap 341 in the operating direction (default If the player does not like the direction of rotation, the player can intervene and correct it during the rotation, or can stop the rotation when the ring cap 341 moves unexpectedly (unintentionally for the player). The ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) can be rotated while leaving such a room.

As shown in FIG. 133, in the selection operation detection process of the modification 2, first, it is determined whether or not an operation proxy flag is set (step S131). When the operation proxy flag is not set in step S131, the ring mechanism 33 is similar to the selection operation detection process of FIG. 131.
1 (ring cap 341) is rotated, and it is determined whether or not there is a change in the operation detection signal from the photoswitches 360a and 360b (step S132). When there is a change in the operation detection signal, a rotation direction selection flag based on the operation detection signal is set (step S133), and “1” is added to the rotation direction counter based on the operation detection signal ( Step S134), the selection operation detection process is terminated.

That is, when the ring mechanism 331 is rotated and the operation detection signal is changed, the selection flag in the direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) in which the ring mechanism 331 is rotated is set, and further, the rotation is operated. The rotation direction of the ring mechanism 331 is stored. There are two types of counters for counting the rotation direction, clockwise and counterclockwise. By differentiating the counter type for each rotation direction based on the operation detection signal, the counter counterclockwise and counterclockwise. The number of rotations in the clockwise direction is individually stored.

On the other hand, if there is no rotation operation of the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) and the operation detection signal does not change in step S132, it is determined whether or not a predetermined detection effective time of the ring mechanism 331 has elapsed (step S135). ). If the operation detection signal does not change even though the detection effective time has passed, the selection flag for the rotation direction with a large count value is set in the past 10 selection operations (step S136), and the count value The ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is rotated in the larger direction (step S137), and the selection operation detection process is terminated. Here, the rotation direction having a large count value in the past 10 selection operations is counted in the previous 10 selection operations from the present time in each counter of the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction counted in step S134. It is the direction of rotation of the counter that takes a large value after comparing each count value. Then, by making such a comparison, it is determined in which direction the player has a high tendency to rotate the ring mechanism 331, and the ring mechanism 331 is rotated in that direction. That is, every time a selection effect is performed, the past 10
The oldest data among the count data of the times is erased, and the rotation direction of the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) by the player in the selected effect is stored as the newest count data. For this reason, even when a player who plays a game on the pachinko machine 1 is switched, the player gradually adjusts to the player every time the selection effect is executed (the player tends to rotate the ring mechanism 331 in any direction). The process of step S136 can be performed on the basis of the judgment (according to whether it is high).

If the operation proxy flag is set in step S131, step S13 is executed.
7, the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is rotated in the direction in which the count value is large (step S138). Thereafter, the change of the operation detection signal is detected by the photoswitches 360a and 360b, thereby setting a rotation direction selection flag based on the operation detection signal (step S139), and then the rotation direction based on the operation detection signal. "1" is added to the counter (step S140), and the selection operation detection process is terminated. At this time, the processing of step S139 does not set the selection flag in the direction of the larger count value rotated in step S138 as it is, but immediately after the player rotates the ring mechanism in the opposite direction immediately after the rotation in the direction of the larger count value. When the 331 (ring cap 341) is rotated, a selection flag in the opposite direction is set. In other words, according to the configuration of the modification example 2, the ring mechanism 331 rotates when the selection operation proxy at the time of the selection effect is determined and when the selection operation proxy at the selection effect is not determined. If the ring mechanism 331 has not been operated, it is compared and determined in which direction the ring mechanism 331 has been rotated in the previous ten selection operations from the present time, and the ring mechanism 331 is rotated in the rotation direction (default direction) with a large number of rotation operations. (Ring cap 341) is rotated. When the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is rotated in the default direction and the player does not operate, the default direction selection flag is set as it is. On the other hand, when the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is rotated in the default direction and the player operates in the anti-default direction, the stepping motor 344 that rotates the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is driven. Is stopped, the rotation operation of the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) by the player is prioritized, and the selection flag for the anti-default direction is set.

As described above, in this embodiment, the player leaves room for rotating the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) in the anti-default direction. Specifically, the player operates the ring cap 341 in the operating direction (default If the player does not like the direction of rotation, the player can intervene and correct it during the rotation, or can stop the rotation when the ring cap 341 moves unexpectedly (unintentionally for the player). The ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) can be rotated while leaving such a room.

Next, three examples in which the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 function as movable effect means will be described. As a first example, in the decorative design that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 based on the jackpot determination accompanying the winning to the start opening (first start opening 1420, second start opening 1421),
As shown in FIG. 134 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 401, 403 are the same symbol and the reach is displayed (in the figure, the case where the left and right decorative symbols are aligned at "7" is illustrated. ), The medium decoration symbol 402 is displayed in a normal reach variation mode. At this time, the button mechanism 330
The ring mechanism 331 is in a stopped state. That is, the full-color LED 358 for light-decorating the button cap 334 of the button mechanism 330 and the full-color LED 356 for light-decorating the ring cap 341 of the ring mechanism 331 are each in the off state, and the ring cap 341 of the ring mechanism 331 is rotationally driven. The stepping motor 344 is in a drive stop state.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), the middle decoration symbol 402 for determining the loss (in the figure, the case where the middle decoration symbol 402 of “6” is temporarily stopped and displayed) is temporarily stopped and displayed. The Also at this time, the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 are in a stopped state. Then, as shown in FIG. 134 (C), the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 are effect-driven while the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 is in a state where the lost symbol is stopped. Specifically, the button cap 334 of the button mechanism 330 and the ring cap 341 of the ring mechanism 331 emit light when the full color LEDs 358 and 356 are turned on and blinking, and at the same time, the rotation of the stepping motor 344 drives the ring mechanism 331. The ring cap 341 rotates. Thereafter, with the effect driving of the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 being continued, the display on the liquid crystal display device 640 displays the left and right decorative symbols 401 and 403 as shown in FIG. 134 (D). Each of them moves to the upper left and right sides, and is reduced and displayed, and the variation of the middle decorative symbol 402 is resumed, which develops into a super reach variation. In other words, the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 perform an effect that triggers the development from the normal reach variation of the decorative symbol to the super reach variation in the liquid crystal display device 640 by the effect drive.

As a second example, in the decorative design variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 based on the jackpot determination accompanying the winning at the start opening (first start opening 1420, second start opening 1421), FIG.
As shown in FIG. 5 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 401 and 403 are aligned with the same symbol, and the reach mode is displayed. After the middle decorative symbol 402 undergoes reach variation, the lost symbol is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 5A). (In the example, the loss symbol “7, 6, 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed). At this time, the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 are each in a stopped state. Then, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 35 (B), the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 are effect-driven while the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 is in a state where the lost symbol is stopped. Specifically, the button cap 33 of the button mechanism 330 is activated by turning on and blinking the full color LEDs 358 and 356.
4 and the ring cap 341 of the ring mechanism 331 emit light, and at the same time, the ring cap 341 of the ring mechanism 331 is rotated by the rotational drive of the stepping motor 344.

Then, with the effect driving of the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 as described above being continued, the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 is a big hit from the middle decorative pattern 402 that determines the loss, as shown in FIG. And the jackpot symbol is derived to the liquid crystal display device 640 as a final display result (in the figure, the case where the jackpot symbol of “7, 7, 7” is derived) Example). That is, the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 perform an effect that triggers switching from a lost symbol of a decorative symbol to a big hit symbol in the liquid crystal display device 640 by the effect driving.

As a third example, in the decorative design that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 based on the jackpot determination accompanying the winning at the start opening (first start opening 1420, second start opening 1421), FIG.
As shown in FIG. 6 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 401, 403 are aligned with the same symbol, the reach mode is displayed, and after the middle decorative symbol 402 undergoes reach variation, the non-probable large hit symbol is temporarily displayed ( In the figure, the case where the non-probable big hit symbol of “6, 6, 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed is illustrated). At this time, the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 are each in a stopped state.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (B), the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 are effect-driven while the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 stops the non-probable large hit symbol. Specifically, the button cap 334 of the button mechanism 330 and the ring cap 341 of the ring mechanism 331 emit light when the full color LEDs 358 and 356 are turned on and blinking, and at the same time, the rotation of the stepping motor 344 drives the ring mechanism 331. The ring cap 341 rotates.

Then, in the state where the effect driving of the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 as described above is continued, the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 is switched from the non-probable large hit symbol to the probable large hit symbol as shown in FIG. 136 (C). As a final display result, a probability variation jackpot symbol (special display result) is derived to the liquid crystal display device 640 (in the figure, a case where a probability variation jackpot symbol of “7, 7, 7” is derived is illustrated). . That is, the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 perform an effect that triggers switching from the non-probable large hit symbol of the decorative symbol to the probable big hit symbol in the liquid crystal display device 640 by the effect driving.

In addition, as described in the embodiment, when the selection operation is performed on behalf of the player, it is sufficient to rotate the movable body to the minimum necessary to be detected by the motion detection means. It is desirable that the movable body continues to rotate so that the player can recognize that it is clearly rotating.

Further, the electric drive source for operating the movable body is not limited to the stepping motor described in the embodiment. However, when the electric drive source for rotationally driving the movable body is used, for the following reasons: It is desirable to use a stepping motor as an electrical drive source.

For example, it is expected that it is frequently stopped by the player's finger touch in the rotational drive state of the movable body, but if it is a stepping motor, it will easily step out if it is rotating with weak excitation. Therefore, safety can be ensured. Further, if the excitation for rotation is continued even after the movable body is stopped, the touch is transmitted to the player's finger, so that a fresh surprise can be obtained for the player.
Further, conversely, if the stepping motor is applied with a weak excitation enough to maintain the movable body in a stopped state, a click feeling can be generated when the movable body is rotated, and the operability is improved.

Further, if a motor having a large detent torque (non-excitation holding torque) is selected, even excitation is not required. Further, for example, when a DC motor is used as an electrical drive source, if it is forcibly stopped in a rotational drive state of the movable body, an armature voltage (counterelectromotive force) disappears, so that a large current flows and heat generation or It is not preferable in terms of durability. In contrast, stepping motors do not have such concerns. For the above reasons, it is desirable that the electric drive source is a stepping motor.

By the way, in the function as the movable effect means of the ring mechanism 331 described above, the rotation operation of the ring cap 341 constituting the ring mechanism 331 is the development of reach fluctuation, switching from the lose symbol to the big hit symbol, and the positive change from the non-probable big hit symbol. Switch to jackpot symbol,
As a result, it functions as a notice effect. Therefore, as a notice effect of such a ring mechanism 331, during the development of reach fluctuation,
The player may be made to recognize the jackpot reliability of the reach fluctuation that develops according to the mode of the rotational operation of the ring cap 341. Hereinafter, such a configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (D) show a ring mechanism 33 that functions as a movable effect means.
1 and an explanatory view showing an example of a display screen of a liquid crystal display device 640 corresponding to this,
38 is a flowchart showing the rotation advance notice control process in the effect control process.

First, as shown in FIG. 137 (A), after the left and right decorative symbols 401 and 403 are aligned with the same symbol and the reach mode is displayed (in the same diagram, the left and right decorative symbols are aligned with "7") For example)
The middle decorative symbol 402 (in which the “6” middle decorative symbol 402 is temporarily stopped) is temporarily stopped. Is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (B), the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 are effect-driven in a state where the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 stops and displays the lost symbol. Specifically, the button cap 334 of the button mechanism 330 and the ring cap 341 of the ring mechanism 331 emit light when the full color LEDs 358 and 356 are turned on and blinking, and at the same time, the rotation of the stepping motor 344 drives the ring mechanism 331. The ring cap 341 rotates. Such a button mechanism 330 and ring mechanism 3
At the same time as the production drive of 31 is started, the characters 410 “Please stop the rotation of the ring” are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640, and the player can stop the rotation operation of the ring cap 341. It is supposed to prompt.

Then, when the reach variation that develops is low in reliability, in other words, when developing from the normal reach variation to the long reach variation (first production mode), as shown in FIG. When the player grasps the cap 341 with the hand H and the rotation of the ring cap 341 is forcibly stopped, this is detected by the photo switch 360 of the ring mechanism 331.
a, 360b detect and stop the effect drive of the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 (first mode operation control means). Specifically, the light emission of the button cap 334 and the ring cap 341 is stopped by stopping the lighting / flashing drive of each full-color LED 358, 356, and at the same time, the ring cap is stopped by stopping the rotation of the stepping motor 344. The rotation of 341 is stopped. As a result, the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 is not affected by the left and right decorative symbols 401 and 403 moving to the left and right upper ends of the display screen, and the variation of the middle decorative symbol 402 is resumed, resulting in low hit performance reliability. It develops into long reach fluctuation.

On the other hand, when the reach fluctuation that develops is high in the reliability of the big hit, in other words, when the normal reach fluctuation changes to the super reach fluctuation (second production mode), as shown in FIG. When the player holds the cap 341 with the hand H, the rotation operation of the ring cap 341 is forcibly stopped. However, in this case, even if this is detected by the photoswitches 360a and 360b of the ring mechanism 331, the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 33 are detected.
1 effect driving is continued (second mode operation control means). Thus, the button cap 334
The ring cap 341 emits light continuously. Further, since the player continues to forcibly press the ring cap 341 during the rotation operation with the hand H, the ring cap 341 continues.
Vibration is received from the stepping motor 344 that drives the motor. Note that such vibration of the stepping motor 344 can be realized only by the player who touches the ring cap 341 with his / her finger. Accordingly, the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 is displayed on the left and right decorative symbols 401 and 403 to the left and right upper ends of the display screen, respectively, and is reduced and displayed, and the variation of the middle decorative symbol 402 is resumed, and the big hit Developed into highly reliable super reach fluctuations.
That is, the ring mechanism 331 notifies the development from the normal reach variation of the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 640 by the effect driving (rotation operation) and continues the rotation operation while the player holds the ring cap 341. Whether or not the reliability of the jackpot of the reach fluctuation that develops depending on whether or not is high is predicted. Further, the advance notice from the normal reach variation of the decorative pattern is not known unless the player touches the ring cap 341. Therefore, the player can select whether or not to receive a notice depending on whether or not he / she touches the ring cap 341, and as a result, the range of ways to enjoy the game is widened.

Here, regarding the rotation advance notice control processing of the ring mechanism 331 by the peripheral control board 2830,
A description will be given with reference to FIG. In FIG. 138, the peripheral control board 2830 first determines whether or not a rotation advance notice command has been received from the main control board 2094 side (step S151).
). The rotation advance notice command is executed from the main control board 2094 side to the peripheral control board 2830 side when executing a notice effect for rotating the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) in accordance with the reach variation of the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 640. A command signal to be sent. Step S1
When the rotation advance command is not received at 51, the rotation advance control process is terminated as it is.
On the other hand, when the rotation advance notice command is received in step S151, the peripheral control board 2830
The ring cap 341 is rotated by drivingly controlling the stepping motor 344 (step S152). At this time, as a notice of rotation of the ring mechanism 331, full color LE
D356 is turned on and blinked to decorate the ring cap 341 with light.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ring cap 341 continues to rotate, in other words, whether or not there is a change in the operation detection signal from the photoswitches 360a and 360b (step S153). When the rotation operation of the ring cap 341 continues without the player grasping the ring cap 341 in step S153, that is, when there is a change in the operation detection signal, the ring cap 341 performed as a notice effect according to the reach variation is performed. Rotation control time (for example,
It is determined whether or not (10 seconds) has elapsed (step S154). And ring cap 3
If the rotation operation of the ring cap 341 is not stopped by the player even after the rotation control time 41 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S157 as it is, and the rotation operation and light decoration of the ring cap 341 are stopped, and the rotation advance control is performed. End the process.

On the other hand, in step S153, the player grasps the ring cap 341 and holds the ring cap 34.
When the rotation operation of 1 is stopped, that is, when there is no change in the operation detection signal,
It is determined whether or not the reach fluctuation accompanied by the rotation advance notice of the ring mechanism 331 is a super reach fluctuation with high hit reliability (step S155). In step S155, it is determined whether the variation pattern command sent from the main control board 2094 side to the peripheral control board 2830 side is a super-reach fluctuation command with a high hit reliability with a notice of rotation of the ring mechanism 331 ( This is a command for a long reach fluctuation with low jackpot reliability accompanied by a notice of rotation of the ring mechanism 331). If the change pattern command is not a super reach change command but a long reach change command with low hit hit reliability in step S155, the process proceeds to step S157 as it is, and the rotation operation and light decoration of the ring cap 341 are stopped to rotate. The notice control process is terminated. That is, in the case where a rotation advance notice of the ring mechanism 331 is performed as a notice effect associated with a long reach fluctuation with low jackpot reliability, when the player holds the ring cap 341 and stops the rotation operation of the ring cap 341, the ring cap 341 is stopped.
When the player stops the rotation of the ring cap 341 without waiting for the rotation control time (for example, 10 seconds), the driving of the stepping motor 344 and the full color LED 356 is stopped, and the ring mechanism 331 notifies the rotation. It is supposed to end.

If the variation pattern command is a super-reach variation command with high hit reliability in step S155, it is determined whether or not the rotation control time (for example, 10 seconds) of the ring cap 341 has elapsed (step S156). When the rotation control time of the ring cap 341 elapses, the process proceeds to step S157, where the rotation operation and light decoration of the ring cap 341 are stopped, and the rotation notice control process is ended. That is, when a rotation advance notice of the ring mechanism 331 is performed as a notice effect resulting from a super reach variation with high hit reliability, even if the player holds the ring cap 341 and stops the rotation operation of the ring cap 341, at that time If the rotation control time (for example, 10 seconds) of the ring cap 341 elapses by continuing the rotation notification of the ring mechanism 331, the driving of the stepping motor 344 and the full color LED 356 is stopped and the rotation notification by the ring mechanism 331 is ended. It has become.

In the above-described rotation advance notice of the ring mechanism 331, the player recognizes the jackpot reliability of the developed reach fluctuation in a mode after the player stops the rotation operation of the ring cap 341. Such a configuration may allow the player to recognize whether or not there is a change from a lost symbol to a jackpot symbol, or whether or not a non-probable variable big hit symbol is switched to a probabilistic big hit symbol. Hereinafter, such a configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. FIGS. 139 (A) to 139 (D) show a ring mechanism 331 that functions as a movable effect means.
FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 corresponding to the display screen shown in FIG.
Reference numerals 0 (A) to (D) are explanatory views showing an example of a ring mechanism 331 that functions as a movable effect means and a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 corresponding thereto.

First, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 401 and 403 are aligned with the same symbol and the reach mode is displayed as a configuration for allowing the player to recognize whether or not there is a switch from the lose symbol to the jackpot symbol. After (In the figure, the case where the decorative patterns on the left and right are aligned with "7" is illustrated),
The medium decorative design 402 (in which the “6” medium decorative design 402 is temporarily stopped and displayed) is temporarily stopped and displayed. Is done. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 are effect-driven in a state where the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 stops the lost symbol. Specifically, the button cap 334 of the button mechanism 330 and the ring cap 341 of the ring mechanism 331 emit light when the full color LEDs 358 and 356 are turned on and blinking, and at the same time, the rotation of the stepping motor 344 drives the ring mechanism 331. The ring cap 341 rotates. Note that such a button mechanism 330 and ring mechanism 33 are provided.
At the same time as the effect driving of No. 1 is started, the character 410 “Please stop the rotation of the ring” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 to indicate that the player stops the rotation operation of the ring cap 341. It is supposed to prompt.

And when there is no switching from the lose symbol to the jackpot symbol (first production mode)
As shown in FIG. 139 (C), when the player grips the rotating ring cap 341 with the hand H and forcibly stops the rotating operation of the ring cap 341, this is indicated by the photoswitch 360a of the ring mechanism 331. 360b detects the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331.
Is stopped (first mode operation control means). Specifically, each full color LED 35
The light emission of the button cap 334 and the ring cap 341 is stopped by stopping the lighting / flashing drive of 8,356, and at the same time, the rotation of the ring cap 341 is stopped by stopping the rotation of the stepping motor 344. Further, in this case, the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 does not change the stop results of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 401, 402, and 403, and the losing symbol is derived as a final display result as it is (see FIG. (In the example, the lost symbol “7, 6, 7” is derived as the final display result).

On the other hand, when there is a switch from the lost symbol to the big hit symbol (second effect mode), as shown in FIG. 139 (D), if the player holds the rotating ring cap 341 with the hand H, the force is forced. Thus, the rotation operation of the ring cap 341 is stopped. However, in this case, even if this is detected by the photoswitches 360a and 360b of the ring mechanism 331, the button mechanism 330
And the effect drive of the ring mechanism 331 is continued (second mode operation control means). As a result, the button cap 334 and the ring cap 341 continue to emit light. Further, the player is forced to press and hold the ring cap 341 during the rotation operation with the hand H, and thus receives a vibration from the stepping motor 344 that drives the ring cap 341.
Note that such vibration of the stepping motor 344 can be realized only by the player who touches the ring cap 341 with his / her finger. Along with this, the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 switches the stop result of the medium decoration symbol 402, and the jackpot symbol is derived as the final display result (in the same figure, “7, 7, 7”). Example of the case where the jackpot symbol is derived as the final display result). Further, the notice of switching to the jackpot symbol is not known unless the player touches the ring cap 341. Therefore, the player can select whether or not to receive a notice depending on whether or not he / she touches the ring cap 341, and as a result, the range of ways to enjoy the game is widened.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (A), the left and right decorative symbols 401 and 403 are aligned in the same symbol and reach form as a configuration for allowing the player to recognize whether or not the non-probable variable bonus symbol is switched to the probability variable bonus symbol. Is displayed, and the non-probable variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed once the middle decorative symbol 402 has changed reach (in the same figure, the non-probable big hit symbol of “6, 6. 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed. Example). At this time, the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 are each in a stopped state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 are effect-driven while the display on the liquid crystal display device 640 stops the non-probable large hit symbol. Specifically, the button cap 334 of the button mechanism 330 and the ring cap 3 of the ring mechanism 331 are driven by turning on and blinking the full color LEDs 358 and 356.
41 emits light, and at the same time, the ring cap 341 of the ring mechanism 331 is rotated by the rotational drive of the stepping motor 344. At the same time that the effect driving of the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 is started, the liquid crystal display device 640 displays a character 410 “Please stop the rotation of the ring” to the player. The rotation of the ring cap 341 is urged to stop.

When there is no switching from the non-probable big hit symbol to the probable big hit symbol (first effect mode), as shown in FIG. 140 (C), the player holds the rotating ring cap 341 with the hand H. When the rotation operation of the ring cap 341 is forcibly stopped, the photo switches 360a and 360b of the ring mechanism 331 detect this, and the effect driving of the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 is stopped (first mode operation). Control means). Specifically, the light emission of the button cap 334 and the ring cap 341 is stopped by stopping the lighting / flashing drive of each full-color LED 358, 356, and at the same time, the ring cap is stopped by stopping the rotation of the stepping motor 344. The rotation of 341 is stopped. Further, in this case, the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 does not change the stop results of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 401, 402, and 403, and the non-probability big hit symbol is derived as the final display result ( In the figure,
An example is the case where the non-probable big hit symbol of “6, 6, 6” is derived as the final display result).

On the other hand, when there is a switching from a non-probable big hit symbol to a probable big hit symbol (second effect mode), as shown in FIG. 140 (D), the player holds the ring cap 341 during the rotating operation with the hand H. Then, the rotation operation of the ring cap 341 is forcibly stopped. However, in this case, even if this is detected by the photo switches 360a and 360b of the ring mechanism 331, the effect driving of the button mechanism 330 and the ring mechanism 331 is continued (second mode operation control means). As a result, the button cap 334 and the ring cap 341 continue to emit light. Further, the player is forced to press and hold the ring cap 341 during the rotation operation with the hand H, and thus receives a vibration from the stepping motor 344 that drives the ring cap 341. Such vibration of the stepping motor 344 is caused by the ring cap 341.
Only the player who touched can feel it. Accordingly, the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 switches the stop results of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 401, 402, and 403, and the probability variation big hit symbol is derived as the final display result (in the same figure). Shows an example in which a probable big hit symbol of “7, 7, 7” is derived as the final display result). In addition, the advance notice of switching to the probable big hit symbol is not known unless the player touches the ring cap 341. Therefore, the player can select whether or not to receive a notice depending on whether or not he / she touches the ring cap 341, and as a result, the range of ways to enjoy the game is widened.

In addition, when the ring mechanism 331 functions as an alternative operation means at the time of the selection effect, the ring cap 341 is rotated according to the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 to operate the ring cap 341 at the time of the selection effect. May be explained in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. Hereinafter, this configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 141 (A) to (C)
Is a ring mechanism 331 that functions as an operation explanation unit, and a liquid crystal display device 640 corresponding thereto.
It is explanatory drawing which shows an example with a display screen.

First, as shown in FIG. 141 (A), an image for selecting a super reach variation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 as a display on the liquid crystal display device 640 at the time of the selection effect. Specifically, the option image 404a of the variation mode A (the letter “A” is illustrated in the figure) and the option image 404b of the variation mode B (the letter “B” is illustrated in the figure) Are displayed side by side, and below the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) alternately rotate clockwise and counterclockwise, and the button mechanism 330 (button cap 334) for selection determination is pressed. By displaying the image 405b and the characters 406b of “Please select with the operation ring”, a display that prompts the player to select the variation mode by the rotation operation of the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is performed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (B), each of the alternative images 404a, 40 of the variation modes A, B.
Below 4b, an image 405d in which the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) rotates clockwise and the selection determining button mechanism 330 (button cap 334) is pressed, and when “A” is selected. "406d" is displayed, the player is informed that when the variation mode A is selected, the ring cap 341 is rotated clockwise and the button cap 334 is pressed. At this time, like the image 405d of the ring cap 341 rotating in the clockwise direction, the ring cap 341 is actually rotated in the clockwise direction by the driving of the stepping motor 344. Further, the rotation operation of the stepping motor 344 is performed. The ring cap 341 is light-decorated by lighting and blinking driving of the full color LED 356 so that the player can recognize it.

Thereafter, below each of the alternative images 404a and 404b of the variation modes A and B, FIG. 141 (
C), the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) rotates counterclockwise and the selection determining button mechanism 330 (button cap 334) is pressed.
e and a letter 406e of “when“ B ”is selected” are displayed. When the variation mode B is selected, the ring cap 341 is rotated counterclockwise and the button cap 334 is operated.
The player is instructed to press the button. At this time, the ring cap 341 is actually rotated counterclockwise by the driving of the stepping motor 344 in the same manner as the image 405d of the ring cap 341 rotating counterclockwise. Further, the rotation of the stepping motor 344 is performed. In order to make the player recognize the operation, the ring cap 341 is light-decorated by turning on / flashing the full-color LED 356.

That is, according to the above-described configuration, when the selection effect is executed by the liquid crystal display device 640, the selection method of the options is explained to the player by the display of the liquid crystal display device 640, and the ring cap 341 serving as the selection method is provided. This rotation operation is actually explained to the player by visually rotating the ring cap 341 so that it can be easily understood visually.

In addition, as a configuration of the ring mechanism 331 that functions as the operation explanation unit as described above,
It is not limited only to the selection effect, and for example, it may function as an operation explanation at the time of the reach effect of FIG. 128 described above. Hereinafter, this configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 142A to 142C are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a ring mechanism 331 that functions as an operation explanation unit and a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 corresponding to the ring mechanism 331. FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 142 (A) as in FIG. 128 (B), the left and right decorative symbols 40 are displayed.
1, 403 are the same design and reach form is displayed (in the same figure, the decorative symbols on the left and right are “7”
”And then the left and right decorative symbols 401 and 403 move to the left and right upper ends of the display screen, respectively, and are reduced and displayed as the middle decorative symbol 402 continues to change. To develop. At this time, the rotation of the ring cap 341 is stopped by stopping the driving of the stepping motor 344, and the full color LED 3
The ring cap 341 is in an extinguished state due to the stop of driving 56.

Then, as shown in FIG. 142 (B), as a variation of the super reach, the middle decorative symbol 402a (in the same figure, “6” is determined) with the symbol different from the left and right decorative symbols 401 and 403. The middle decorative symbol is illustrated side by side, and the middle decorative symbol 402b (in the same diagram, “7” medium decorative symbol is illustrated) that determines the big hit with the same symbol as the left and right decorative symbols 401 and 403 is displayed side by side. Below that, an image 405a in which the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) rotates in the clockwise direction and a letter 406a of “turn the operation ring” are displayed, so that the ring mechanism 331 (ring cap 341) is displayed. ) Is displayed to prompt the player to perform a clockwise rotation operation. At this time, like the image 405d of the ring cap 341 rotating in the clockwise direction, the ring cap 341 is actually rotated in the clockwise direction by driving the stepping motor 344. Further, the rotation operation of the stepping motor 344 is performed by the player. In order for the ring cap 341 to be recognized, the ring cap 341 is light-decorated by the lighting / flashing driving of the full-color LED 356. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 142 (C), the middle decorative pattern 402a for determining the loss.
When the effect display for pushing the middle decorative symbol 402b for determining the big hit is started, the rotation operation of the ring cap 341 and the light decoration are stopped accordingly. In this way, in the configuration shown in FIG. 142, the ring cap 341 is rotated in accordance with the display of the liquid crystal display device 640, so that the player can easily understand how to operate the ring cap 341 at the time of reach performance. ing.

As described above, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the movable body that can be visually recognized according to the predetermined rendering mode by the rendering means is provided so that the player can touch it. The player himself / herself can directly experience the movement of the movable body based on this, and as a result, a decrease in interest with respect to the movement of the movable body can be suppressed. In addition, the motion detection unit can detect the movement of the movable body that can be touched, and the motion detection by the motion detection unit, in other words, according to the finger touch operation of the movable body based on the player's intention, Since the control that affects the performance contents of the performance means is performed, it is possible to generate a novel game characteristic in which the player's intention intervenes in the operation of the gaming machine.

Further, according to this configuration, the player is notified that the predetermined effect mode is executed by the effect means by the operation of the movable body. And as a notice operation by such a movable body, when a predetermined production mode turns into the first production mode, if a player touches a movable body and forcibly stops operation of the movable body As a result, the driving of the electric drive source is stopped, while when the predetermined production mode is the second production mode, the player forcibly touches the movable body to operate the movable body. Even if it is stopped, the drive of the electric drive source is continued without stopping. For this reason, when the player touches the movable body, it can be known whether the predetermined production mode is the first production mode or the second production mode, but this fact is the player who touched the fact. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in touching the movable body and to suppress a decrease in interest in the notice operation of the movable body.

The effect means is composed of a symbol display means that displays the symbols in a variable manner and stops the display result, and the effect control means performs a variable display of the symbols based on the determination result of the winning determination means, and after a predetermined period has elapsed. The display result of the symbol corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed, and when the determination to give a profit to the player is made by the winning determination means, the symbol is displayed in the reach mode and then the reach effect is executed as the display result. It is comprised from the symbol display control means to stop-display a specific display result. In this case, the winning determination by the winning determination means can be enhanced by the symbol display by the symbol display means, and the determination result can be recognized by the player based on the display result of the symbols. Can prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, the notice operation control means operates the movable body with a display result other than the specific display result being displayed once after the reach effect is executed, and then a mode in which the reach effect is developed in a predetermined manner. Let In this case, after the reach effect is executed, a display result other than the specific display result is once displayed, and then the movable body is operated as an opportunity for the effect that the reach effect is developed. For this reason, the development of reach production can be boosted by the operation of the movable body, and as a result, a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

In addition, the first mode operation control unit drives and controls the electric drive source with the mode developed into a reach production with a low ratio in which the determination result of the winning judgment unit becomes a win determination as the first mode of production, while the second mode The operation control means drives and controls the electric drive source with the aspect that develops the reach effect having a high ratio that the determination result of the winning determination means becomes the winning determination as the second effect aspect. In this case, in the case where the determination result of the winning determination means is a mode that develops to a reach production with a low rate of winning determination, if the player touches the movable body and forcibly stops the operation of the movable body Accordingly, in the case where the driving of the electric drive source is stopped while the determination result of the winning determination means develops to a reach production with a high ratio of winning determination, the player touches the movable body. Thus, even if the operation of the movable body is forcibly stopped, the drive of the electric drive source is continued without stopping. Therefore, when the player touches the movable body, it can be seen whether it develops to a reach production with a low percentage of winning judgment or a reach production with a high percentage of winning judgment. It is possible to increase interest in touching and to suppress a decrease in interest in the notice operation of the movable body.

In addition, the notice operation control means sets a specific display result as a final display result after a display result other than the specific display result is displayed once, or a mode in which a display result other than the specific display result is displayed as a predetermined effect mode. Move the movable body. In this case, after the display result other than the specific display result is once displayed, the specific display result is displayed as the final display result (including the case where the final display result is a display result other than the specific display result). The movable body operates as an opportunity. For this reason, it is possible to excite the effect of switching from the loss display result to the jackpot display result by the operation of the movable body, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, the first mode operation control means drives and controls the electric drive source with the mode in which the display result other than the specific display result is displayed as the final display result as the first effect mode, while the second mode operation control. The means controls the drive of the electric drive source with the second display mode in which the specific display result is displayed as the final display result. In this case, when the display result other than the specific display result is displayed as the final display result, if the player forcibly stops the operation of the movable body by touching the movable body, In the case where the drive of the electric drive source is stopped along with the specific display result as the final display result, the player touches the movable body to force the movement of the movable body. Even if the operation is stopped, the drive of the electric drive source is continued without stopping. Therefore, when the player touches the movable body, it can be determined whether a display result other than the specific display result is displayed as the final display result or the specific display result is displayed. It is possible to increase interest in touching and to suppress a decrease in interest in the notice operation of the movable body.

In addition, based on the fact that the winning determination is made in the winning determination means and the specific condition is satisfied, it is easier to generate the next profit grant state after the profit grant state by the profit grant state control means than in the normal gaming state. Special game state control means for controlling to a special game state, and stage action control means for controlling the operation of the movable body based on drive control of the electric drive source, and the symbol display control means is selected in the winning judgment means When a determination is made and a specific condition is met,
The special display result predetermined as the specific display result is stopped and displayed, and the notice operation control means displays the special display result as the final display result after the specific display result other than the special display result is once displayed.
Alternatively, the movable body is operated with a mode in which a specific display result other than the special display result is displayed as a predetermined rendering mode. In this case, after the specific display result other than the special display result is once displayed, the special display result is displayed as the final display result (the final display result may be a specific display result other than the special display result. The movable body operates as an opportunity. For this reason, the effect which switches from the display result which is not controlled to a special game state by the operation | movement of a movable body to the display result which is controlled to a special game state can be excited, and, thereby, the interest reduction of a game can be suppressed.

The first mode operation control means drives and controls the electric drive source with the mode in which the specific display result other than the special display result is displayed as the final display result as the first effect mode, while the second mode operation The control means drives and controls the electric drive source with a mode in which a special display result is displayed as a final display result as a second rendering mode. In this case, in the case where a specific display result other than the special display result is displayed as the final display result, when the player forcibly stops the operation of the movable body by touching the movable body, Along with this, while the drive of the electric drive source is stopped, the special display result is displayed as the final display result, and the player touches the movable body to operate the movable body. Even if it is forcibly stopped, the drive of the electric drive source is continued without stopping. For this reason, when the player touches the movable body, it is possible to know whether a specific display result other than the special display result or a special display result is displayed as the final display result. It is possible to increase interest in touching the finger and to suppress a decrease in interest in the notice operation of the movable body.

The movable body is composed of a ring member that rotates based on the drive of a motor as an electrical drive source. In this case, the effect of the effect means can be more exciting by rotating the ring member according to a predetermined effect mode by the effect means.

The ring member is made of a light-transmitting material, and light emitting means for optically decorating the ring member is provided therein. In this case, since the inside of the rotating ring member can be light-decorated by the light emitting means, it is possible to further suppress a decrease in visual interest for the ring member.

In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine. However, the gaming machine may be a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, such as a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined. The invention can be applied.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 329 Operation ring unit 330 Button mechanism 331 Ring mechanism 334 Button cap 336 Plunger 336a Detection protrusion 341 Ring cap 342 Ring gear 344 Stepping motor 351 Shielding board 352 LED board 353 LED / switch board 354 unit Base 356 Full color LED
358 full color LED
359 Photo switch 360a, 360b Photo switch 640 Liquid crystal display device 1404 Opening and closing prize device 1420 First start port 1421 Second start port 2094 Main control board 2830 Peripheral control board

Claims (1)

A winning determination means for determining whether or not a profit should be given to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a profit granting state for giving a profit to the player based on the winning determination made by the corresponding winning determination means Profit granting state control means for controlling the effect, effect means for effecting the game, effect control means for controlling the effect by the effect means based on the determination result of the winning determination means, and the predetermined effect by the effect means According to an aspect, a game machine comprising: a movable body that operates to be visible to a player based on driving of an electric drive source,
The movable body is configured to be touchable by a player even in the driving state of the electric drive source, and provided with an operation detection means for detecting the operation of the movable body,
The effect control means includes a motion detection effect control means for performing control that affects the effect contents of the effect means according to the motion detection of the movable body by the motion detection means,
When the predetermined effect mode is executed by the effect means, the gaming machine is configured to execute the predetermined effect mode by driving the electric drive source and operating the movable body. Is provided with a notice operation control means for notifying the player of
The advance notice action control means, if more predetermined representation embodiment the representation section is a particular representation embodiment, even if the player is stop the operation of the movable body, stops driving before Symbol electric driving source gaming machine characterized in that it comprises a and a behavior control means to continue without.

Images